xref: /titanic_51/usr/src/grub/grub-0.97/docs/texinfo.tex (revision bfed486ad8de8b8ebc6345a8e10accae08bf2f45)
1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
2%
3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
5%
6\def\texinfoversion{2004-11-25.16}
7%
8% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software
10% Foundation, Inc.
11%
12% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
13% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
14% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
15% your option) any later version.
16%
17% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
18% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
19% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
20% General Public License for more details.
21%
22% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
23% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
24% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
25% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
26%
27% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
28% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
29% restriction.  (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
30%
31% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
32% reports; you can get the latest version from:
33%   http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
34%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
35%     (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
36% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
37% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
38%
39% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
40% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
41% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
42%
43% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
44% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
45% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
46%   tex foo.texi
47%   texindex foo.??
48%   tex foo.texi
49%   tex foo.texi
50%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
51% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
52% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
53% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
54%
55% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
56% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
57% full Texinfo distribution.
58%
59% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
60
61
62\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
63
64% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
65% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
66% they might have appeared in the input file name.
67\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
68  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
69
70\message{Basics,}
71\chardef\other=12
72
73% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
74% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
75\let\+ = \relax
76
77% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
78\let\ptexb=\b
79\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
80\let\ptexc=\c
81\let\ptexcomma=\,
82\let\ptexdot=\.
83\let\ptexdots=\dots
84\let\ptexend=\end
85\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
86\let\ptexexclam=\!
87\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
88\let\ptexgtr=>
89\let\ptexhat=^
90\let\ptexi=\i
91\let\ptexindent=\indent
92\let\ptexinsert=\insert
93\let\ptexlbrace=\{
94\let\ptexless=<
95\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
96\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
97\let\ptexplus=+
98\let\ptexrbrace=\}
99\let\ptexslash=\/
100\let\ptexstar=\*
101\let\ptext=\t
102
103% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
104% starts a new line in the output.
105\newlinechar = `^^J
106
107% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
108% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
109%
110\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
111  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
112\else
113  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
114\fi
115
116% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
117\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
118\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
119\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
120\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
121\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined     \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
122\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
123\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
124\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
125\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
126\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
127\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
128\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
129\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
130\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
131\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
132\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
133\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
134\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
135\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
136%
137\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
138\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
139\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
140\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
141\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
142\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
143\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
144\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
145\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
146\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
147\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
148\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
149%
150\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
151\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
152\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
153\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
154\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
155
156% In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
157% in some cases the escape char.
158\chardef\colonChar = `\:
159\chardef\commaChar = `\,
160\chardef\dotChar   = `\.
161\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
162\chardef\questChar = `\?
163\chardef\semiChar  = `\;
164\chardef\underChar = `\_
165
166\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
167\chardef\spacecat = 10
168\def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat}
169
170% Ignore a token.
171%
172\def\gobble#1{}
173
174% The following is used inside several \edef's.
175\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
176
177% Hyphenation fixes.
178\hyphenation{
179  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
180  ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
181  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
182  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
183  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
184  spell-ing spell-ings
185  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
186  wide-spread wrap-around
187}
188
189% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
190\newdimen\bindingoffset
191\newdimen\normaloffset
192\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
193
194% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
195% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
196% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
197%
198\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
199
200% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
201% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
202% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
203% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
204% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
205%
206\def\|{%
207  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
208  \leavevmode
209  %
210  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
211  \vadjust{%
212    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
213    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
214    \vskip-\baselineskip
215    %
216    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
217    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
218    \llap{%
219      %
220      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
221      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
222      %
223      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
224      \hskip 12pt
225    }%
226  }%
227}
228
229% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
230% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
231% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
232% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
233% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
234%
235\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
236\def\loggingall{%
237  \tracingstats2
238  \tracingpages1
239  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
240  \tracingparagraphs1
241  \tracingoutput1
242  \tracingmacros2
243  \tracingrestores1
244  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
245  \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
246    \tracingscantokens1
247    \tracingifs1
248    \tracinggroups1
249    \tracingnesting2
250    \tracingassigns1
251  \fi
252  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
253  \errorcontextlines16
254}%
255
256% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
257% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
258%
259\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
260  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
261\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
262  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
263\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
264  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
265
266% For @cropmarks command.
267% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
268%
269\newif\ifcropmarks
270\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
271%
272% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
273% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
274%
275\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
276\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
277\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
278\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
279
280% Main output routine.
281\chardef\PAGE = 255
282\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
283
284\newbox\headlinebox
285\newbox\footlinebox
286
287% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
288% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
289\def\onepageout#1{%
290  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
291  %
292  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
293  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
294  %
295  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
296  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
297  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
298  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
299  %
300  {%
301    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
302    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
303    % before the \shipout runs.
304    %
305    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
306    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
307    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
308                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
309    \shipout\vbox{%
310      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
311      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
312      %
313      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
314        \hsize = \outerhsize
315        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
316        \vtop to0pt{%
317          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
318          \nointerlineskip
319          \line{%
320            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
321            \hfill
322            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
323          }%
324          \vss}%
325        \vskip\topandbottommargin
326        \line\bgroup
327          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
328          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
329          \vbox\bgroup
330      \fi
331      %
332      \unvbox\headlinebox
333      \pagebody{#1}%
334      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
335        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
336        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
337        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
338        \vskip 2\baselineskip
339        \unvbox\footlinebox
340      \fi
341      %
342      \ifcropmarks
343          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
344        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
345        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
346        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
347        \vbox to0pt{\vss
348          \line{%
349            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
350            \hfill
351            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
352          }%
353          \nointerlineskip
354          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
355        }%
356      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
357      \fi
358    }% end of \shipout\vbox
359  }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
360  \advancepageno
361  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
362}
363
364\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
365
366\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
367{\catcode`\@ =11
368\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
369% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
370\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
371  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
372\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
373\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
374\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
375}
376
377% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
378% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
379% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
380%
381\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
382\def\nstop{\vbox
383  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
384\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
385\def\nsbot{\vbox
386  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
387
388% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
389% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
390% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
391%
392\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
393\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
394  \def\next{#2}%
395  \begingroup
396    \obeylines
397    \spaceisspace
398    #1%
399    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
400}
401
402{\obeylines %
403  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
404    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
405    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
406  }%
407}
408
409% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
410\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
411\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
412
413% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
414%
415% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
416%    @end itemize  @c foo
417% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
418% by \finishparsearg.
419%
420\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
421\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
422\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
423  \def\temp{#3}%
424  \ifx\temp\empty
425    % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run;
426    % thus we reuse \temp.
427    \let\temp\finishparsearg
428  \else
429    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
430  \fi
431  % Put the space token in:
432  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
433}
434
435% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
436% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
437% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
438% just before passing the control to \next.
439% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
440% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
441% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
442%
443% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
444%
445\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}}
446
447% \parseargdef\foo{...}
448%	is roughly equivalent to
449% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
450% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
451%
452% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
453% favourite TeX trick.  --kasal, 16nov03
454
455\def\parseargdef#1{%
456  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
457}
458\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
459  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
460  \def#1##1%
461}
462
463% Several utility definitions with active space:
464{
465  \obeyspaces
466  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
467
468  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
469  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
470  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
471  % should produce a line of output anyway.
472  %
473  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
474
475  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
476  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
477  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
478  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
479}
480
481
482\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
483
484% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
485%
486%   \envdef\foo{...}
487%   \def\Efoo{...}
488%
489% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
490% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
491% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
492% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
493% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
494%
495% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
496% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group.  (The
497% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
498% special case.)
499
500
501% At runtime, environments start with this:
502\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
503% initialize
504\let\thisenv\empty
505
506% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
507\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
508\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
509
510% Check whether we're in the right environment:
511\def\checkenv#1{%
512  \def\temp{#1}%
513  \ifx\thisenv\temp
514  \else
515    \badenverr
516  \fi
517}
518
519% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
520\def\badenverr{%
521  \errhelp = \EMsimple
522  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
523    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
524}
525\def\inenvironment#1{%
526  \ifx#1\empty
527    out of any environment%
528  \else
529    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
530  \fi
531}
532
533% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
534% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
535%
536\parseargdef\end{%
537  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
538  \else
539    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
540    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
541    \csname E#1\endcsname
542    \endgroup
543  \fi
544}
545
546\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
547
548
549%% Simple single-character @ commands
550
551% @@ prints an @
552% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
553\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
554
555% This is turned off because it was never documented
556% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
557%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
558%% but suppressing ligatures.
559%\def\`{{`}}
560%\def\'{{'}}
561
562% Used to generate quoted braces.
563\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
564\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
565\let\{=\mylbrace
566\let\}=\myrbrace
567\begingroup
568  % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
569  % and @{ and @} for the aux file.
570  \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
571  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
572  \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
573  !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
574  !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
575  !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
576  !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
577!endgroup
578
579% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
580\let\comma = ,
581
582% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
583% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
584\let\, = \c
585\let\dotaccent = \.
586\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
587\let\tieaccent = \t
588\let\ubaraccent = \b
589\let\udotaccent = \d
590
591% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
592% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
593\def\questiondown{?`}
594\def\exclamdown{!`}
595\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
596\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
597
598% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
599\def\imacro{i}
600\def\jmacro{j}
601\def\dotless#1{%
602  \def\temp{#1}%
603  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
604  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
605  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
606  \fi\fi
607}
608
609% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
610% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
611%
612\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
613
614% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
615% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
616% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
617% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
618% \scriptscriptstyle).
619%
620\def\LaTeX{%
621  L\kern-.36em
622  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
623   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
624  \kern-.15em
625  \TeX
626}
627
628% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
629% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
630% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
631% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
632% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
633{\catcode`@ = 11
634 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
635 % if the definition is written into an index file.
636 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
637 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
638}
639
640% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
641\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
642
643% @* forces a line break.
644\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
645
646% @/ allows a line break.
647\let\/=\allowbreak
648
649% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
650\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
651
652% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
653\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
654
655% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
656\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
657
658% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
659% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
660% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
661\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
662
663% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
664% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
665% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
666% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
667% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
668% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
669% the text is small, which looks bad.
670%
671% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
672% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
673% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
674% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
675% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
676% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
677%
678\newbox\groupbox
679\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
680%
681\envdef\group{%
682  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
683    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
684    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
685  \fi
686  \startsavinginserts
687  %
688  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
689    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
690    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
691    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
692    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
693    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
694    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
695    \comment
696}
697%
698% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
699% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
700% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
701% above.  But it's pretty close.
702\def\Egroup{%
703    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
704    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
705    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
706    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
707  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
708  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
709  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
710  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
711  \dimen2 = \pageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
712  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
713  % group, force a page break.
714  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
715    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
716      \page
717    \fi
718  \fi
719  \box\groupbox
720  \prevdepth = \dimen1
721  \checkinserts
722}
723%
724% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
725% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
726%
727\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
728group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
729where each line of input produces a line of output.}
730
731% @need space-in-mils
732% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
733
734\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
735
736% Old definition--didn't work.
737%\parseargdef\need{\par %
738%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
739%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
740%{\baselineskip=0pt%
741%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
742%\prevdepth=-1000pt
743%}}
744
745\parseargdef\need{%
746  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
747  % paragraph.
748  \par
749  %
750  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
751  \dimen0 = #1\mil
752  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
753  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
754  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
755    %
756    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
757    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
758    % And a page break here is fine.
759    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
760    %
761    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
762    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
763    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
764    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
765    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
766    %
767    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
768    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
769    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
770    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
771    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
772    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
773    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
774    \penalty9999
775    %
776    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
777    \kern -#1\mil
778    %
779    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
780    \nobreak
781  \fi
782}
783
784% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
785
786\let\br = \par
787
788% @page forces the start of a new page.
789%
790\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
791
792% @exdent text....
793% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
794
795% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
796% That's how much \exdent should take out.
797\newskip\exdentamount
798
799% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
800\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
801
802% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
803\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
804  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
805
806% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
807% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
808% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.
809%
810\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
811\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
812%
813\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
814  \nobreak
815  \kern-\strutdepth
816  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
817    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
818    \vss
819    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
820    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
821    \ifx#1l%
822      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
823    \else
824      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
825    \fi
826    \null
827  }%
828}}
829\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
830\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
831%
832% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
833% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
834% else use TEXT for both).
835%
836\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
837\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
838  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
839  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
840    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
841    \def\righttext{#2}%
842  \else
843    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
844    \def\righttext{#1}%
845  \fi
846  %
847  \ifodd\pageno
848    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
849  \else
850    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
851  \fi
852  \temp
853}
854
855% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
856%
857\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
858\def\includezzz#1{%
859  \pushthisfilestack
860  \def\thisfile{#1}%
861  {%
862    \makevalueexpandable
863    \def\temp{\input #1 }%
864    \expandafter
865  }\temp
866  \popthisfilestack
867}
868\def\filenamecatcodes{%
869  \catcode`\\=\other
870  \catcode`~=\other
871  \catcode`^=\other
872  \catcode`_=\other
873  \catcode`|=\other
874  \catcode`<=\other
875  \catcode`>=\other
876  \catcode`+=\other
877  \catcode`-=\other
878}
879
880\def\pushthisfilestack{%
881  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
882}
883\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
884  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
885}
886\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
887  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
888}
889
890\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
891\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
892  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
893
894\def\thisfile{}
895
896% @center line
897% outputs that line, centered.
898%
899\parseargdef\center{%
900  \ifhmode
901    \let\next\centerH
902  \else
903    \let\next\centerV
904  \fi
905  \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
906}
907\def\centerH#1{%
908  {%
909    \hfil\break
910    \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
911    \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
912    \line{#1}%
913    \break
914  }%
915}
916\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
917
918% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
919
920\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
921
922% @comment ...line which is ignored...
923% @c is the same as @comment
924% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
925
926\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
927\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
928\commentxxx}
929{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
930
931\let\c=\comment
932
933% @paragraphindent NCHARS
934% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
935% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
936% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
937%
938\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
939\def\noneword{none}
940%
941\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
942  \def\temp{#1}%
943  \ifx\temp\asisword
944  \else
945    \ifx\temp\noneword
946      \defaultparindent = 0pt
947    \else
948      \defaultparindent = #1em
949    \fi
950  \fi
951  \parindent = \defaultparindent
952}
953
954% @exampleindent NCHARS
955% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
956% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
957% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
958\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
959  \def\temp{#1}%
960  \ifx\temp\asisword
961  \else
962    \ifx\temp\noneword
963      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
964    \else
965      \lispnarrowing = #1em
966    \fi
967  \fi
968}
969
970% @firstparagraphindent WORD
971% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
972% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
973% paragraphs.
974%
975% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
976% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
977% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
978% By default, we suppress indentation.
979%
980\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
981\def\insertword{insert}
982%
983\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
984  \def\temp{#1}%
985  \ifx\temp\noneword
986    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
987  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
988    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
989  \else
990    \errhelp = \EMsimple
991    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
992  \fi\fi
993}
994
995% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
996% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
997%
998% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
999% paragraph.
1000%
1001\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
1002  \gdef\indent{%
1003    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1004    \indent
1005  }%
1006  \gdef\noindent{%
1007    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1008    \noindent
1009  }%
1010  \global\everypar = {%
1011    \kern -\parindent
1012    \restorefirstparagraphindent
1013  }%
1014}
1015
1016\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
1017  \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
1018  \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
1019  \global \everypar = {}%
1020}
1021
1022
1023% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
1024%
1025\def\asis#1{#1}
1026
1027% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
1028%
1029% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
1030% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
1031% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
1032% which is what @var uses.
1033{
1034  \catcode\underChar = \active
1035  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
1036    \catcode\underChar=\active
1037    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
1038  }
1039}
1040% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
1041% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
1042% this is not advertised and we don't care.  Texinfo does not
1043% otherwise define @\.
1044%
1045% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
1046\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
1047%
1048\def\math{%
1049  \tex
1050  \mathunderscore
1051  \let\\ = \mathbackslash
1052  \mathactive
1053  $\finishmath
1054}
1055\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
1056
1057% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
1058% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
1059% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
1060%
1061{
1062  \catcode`^ = \active
1063  \catcode`< = \active
1064  \catcode`> = \active
1065  \catcode`+ = \active
1066  \gdef\mathactive{%
1067    \let^ = \ptexhat
1068    \let< = \ptexless
1069    \let> = \ptexgtr
1070    \let+ = \ptexplus
1071  }
1072}
1073
1074% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
1075\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
1076\def\minus{$-$}
1077
1078% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
1079% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
1080% font as three actual period characters.
1081%
1082\def\dots{%
1083  \leavevmode
1084  \hbox to 1.5em{%
1085    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
1086    .\hfil.\hfil.%
1087    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
1088  }%
1089}
1090
1091% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
1092%
1093\def\enddots{%
1094  \dots
1095  \spacefactor=3000
1096}
1097
1098% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
1099% Texinfo's parsing.
1100%
1101\let\comma = ,
1102
1103% @refill is a no-op.
1104\let\refill=\relax
1105
1106% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
1107% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
1108% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
1109%
1110\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
1111\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
1112
1113% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
1114% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
1115% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
1116\def\setfilename{%
1117   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
1118   \iflinks
1119     \tryauxfile
1120     % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
1121     \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
1122   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
1123   \openindices
1124   \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
1125   %
1126   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
1127   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
1128   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
1129   \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
1130   \closein 1
1131   %
1132   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
1133}
1134
1135% Called from \setfilename.
1136%
1137\def\openindices{%
1138  \newindex{cp}%
1139  \newcodeindex{fn}%
1140  \newcodeindex{vr}%
1141  \newcodeindex{tp}%
1142  \newcodeindex{ky}%
1143  \newcodeindex{pg}%
1144}
1145
1146% @bye.
1147\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
1148
1149
1150\message{pdf,}
1151% adobe `portable' document format
1152\newcount\tempnum
1153\newcount\lnkcount
1154\newtoks\filename
1155\newcount\filenamelength
1156\newcount\pgn
1157\newtoks\toksA
1158\newtoks\toksB
1159\newtoks\toksC
1160\newtoks\toksD
1161\newbox\boxA
1162\newcount\countA
1163\newif\ifpdf
1164\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
1165
1166% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
1167% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
1168% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
1169\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
1170\else
1171  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
1172  \else
1173    \ifcase\pdfoutput
1174    \else
1175      \pdftrue
1176    \fi
1177  \fi
1178\fi
1179%
1180\ifpdf
1181  \input pdfcolor
1182  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
1183  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
1184    \def\imagewidth{#2}%
1185    \def\imageheight{#3}%
1186    % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
1187    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
1188    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1189      \immediate\pdfimage
1190    \else
1191      \immediate\pdfximage
1192    \fi
1193      \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
1194      \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
1195      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
1196         #1.pdf%
1197       \else
1198         {#1.pdf}%
1199       \fi
1200    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
1201      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
1202    \fi}
1203  \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
1204    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code in a section title
1205    % aren't expanded.
1206    \atdummies
1207    \normalturnoffactive
1208    \pdfdest name{#1} xyz%
1209  }}
1210  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
1211  \let\linkcolor = \Blue  % was Cyan, but that seems light?
1212  \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
1213  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
1214  % come from Petr Olsak
1215  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
1216    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
1217  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
1218    \advance\tempnum by 1
1219    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
1220  %
1221  % #1 is the section text.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
1222  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node
1223  % text, which might be empty if this toc entry had no
1224  % corresponding node.  #4 is the page number.
1225  %
1226  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
1227    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
1228    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
1229    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
1230    % seem worthwhile, since most documents are normally structured.
1231    \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
1232    \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}\fi
1233    %
1234    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{#1}%
1235  }
1236  %
1237  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
1238    \begingroup
1239      % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
1240      \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
1241      \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
1242      %
1243      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
1244      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1245	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
1246	\def\thissecnum{0}%
1247	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1248      }%
1249      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1250	\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
1251	\def\thissecnum{##2}%
1252	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1253      }%
1254      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1255	\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
1256	\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
1257      }%
1258      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1259	\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
1260      }%
1261      \def\thischapnum{0}%
1262      \def\thissecnum{0}%
1263      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
1264      %
1265      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
1266      % al. a second time, below.
1267      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
1268      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1269      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1270      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1271      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
1272      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
1273      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
1274      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
1275      \input \jobname.toc
1276      %
1277      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
1278      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
1279      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
1280      %
1281      % We use the node names as the destinations.
1282      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
1283        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1284      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1285        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1286      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
1287        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
1288      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
1289        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
1290      %
1291      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
1292      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
1293      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
1294      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
1295      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
1296      %
1297      % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
1298      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Right
1299      % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
1300      \indexnofonts
1301      \turnoffactive
1302      \input \jobname.toc
1303    \endgroup
1304  }
1305  %
1306  \def\makelinks #1,{%
1307    \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
1308    \ifx\params\E
1309      \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
1310    \else
1311      \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
1312      \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
1313      \picknum{#1}%
1314      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
1315        goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
1316      \linkcolor #1%
1317      \advance\lnkcount by 1%
1318      \endlink
1319    \fi
1320    \nextmakelinks
1321  }
1322  \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
1323  \def\pn#1{%
1324    \def\p{#1}%
1325    \ifx\p\lbrace
1326      \let\nextpn=\ppn
1327    \else
1328      \let\nextpn=\ppnn
1329      \def\first{#1}
1330    \fi
1331    \nextpn
1332  }
1333  \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
1334  \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
1335  \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
1336  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
1337    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
1338    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
1339      \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
1340        \advance\filenamelength by 1
1341      \fi
1342    \fi
1343    \nextsp}
1344  \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
1345  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
1346    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
1347  \else
1348    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
1349  \fi
1350  \def\pdfurl#1{%
1351    \begingroup
1352      \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
1353      \makevalueexpandable
1354      \leavevmode\Red
1355      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
1356        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
1357    \endgroup}
1358  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
1359  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
1360  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
1361  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
1362  \def\maketoks{%
1363    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
1364    \ifx\first0\adn0
1365    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
1366    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
1367    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
1368    \else
1369      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
1370      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
1371        \let\next=\maketoks
1372        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
1373        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
1374      \fi
1375    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
1376    \next}
1377  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
1378    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
1379  \def\pdflink#1{%
1380    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
1381    \linkcolor #1\endlink}
1382  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
1383\else
1384  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
1385  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
1386  \let\endlink = \relax
1387  \let\linkcolor = \relax
1388  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
1389\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
1390
1391
1392\message{fonts,}
1393
1394% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
1395% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
1396% italics, not bold italics.
1397%
1398\def\setfontstyle#1{%
1399  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
1400  \csname ten#1\endcsname  % change the current font
1401}
1402
1403% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
1404%
1405\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
1406
1407\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
1408\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
1409\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
1410\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
1411\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
1412
1413% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
1414% So we set up a \sf.
1415\newfam\sffam
1416\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
1417\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
1418
1419% We don't need math for this font style.
1420\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
1421
1422% Default leading.
1423\newdimen\textleading  \textleading = 13.2pt
1424
1425% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
1426% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
1427% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
1428%
1429\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
1430\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
1431\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
1432%
1433\def\setleading#1{%
1434  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
1435  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
1436  \normalbaselines
1437  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
1438    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
1439                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
1440  }%
1441}
1442
1443% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
1444% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
1445% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
1446\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
1447
1448% Use cm as the default font prefix.
1449% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
1450% before you read in texinfo.tex.
1451\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
1452\def\fontprefix{cm}
1453\fi
1454% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
1455\def\rmshape{r}
1456\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
1457\def\bfshape{b}
1458\def\bxshape{bx}
1459\def\ttshape{tt}
1460\def\ttbshape{tt}
1461\def\ttslshape{sltt}
1462\def\itshape{ti}
1463\def\itbshape{bxti}
1464\def\slshape{sl}
1465\def\slbshape{bxsl}
1466\def\sfshape{ss}
1467\def\sfbshape{ss}
1468\def\scshape{csc}
1469\def\scbshape{csc}
1470
1471% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
1472\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
1473\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
1474\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1475\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1476\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1477\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1478\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1479\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1480\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1481\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
1482\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
1483\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
1484
1485% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
1486\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
1487\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
1488\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
1489\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
1490
1491% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
1492\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
1493\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
1494\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
1495\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
1496\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
1497\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
1498\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
1499\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
1500\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
1501\font\smalli=cmmi9
1502\font\smallsy=cmsy9
1503
1504% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
1505\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
1506\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1507\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
1508\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
1509\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
1510\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
1511\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
1512\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
1513\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
1514\font\smalleri=cmmi8
1515\font\smallersy=cmsy8
1516
1517% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
1518\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
1519\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1520\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1521\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1522\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
1523\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
1524\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
1525\let\titlebf=\titlerm
1526\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
1527\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
1528\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
1529\def\authorrm{\secrm}
1530\def\authortt{\sectt}
1531
1532% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
1533\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
1534\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1535\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1536\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1537\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
1538\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
1539\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
1540\let\chapbf=\chaprm
1541\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
1542\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
1543\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
1544
1545% Section fonts (14.4pt).
1546\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
1547\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1548\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1549\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1550\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1551\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
1552\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
1553\let\secbf\secrm
1554\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
1555\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
1556\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
1557
1558% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
1559\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
1560\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1561\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
1562\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
1563\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1564\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
1565\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
1566\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
1567\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
1568\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
1569\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
1570
1571% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
1572\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
1573\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
1574\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
1575\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
1576\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
1577\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
1578\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
1579\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
1580\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
1581\font\reducedi=cmmi10
1582\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
1583
1584% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
1585% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
1586% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
1587% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
1588% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
1589%
1590\def\resetmathfonts{%
1591  \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
1592  \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
1593  \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
1594}
1595
1596% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
1597% of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
1598% current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
1599% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
1600%
1601% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
1602% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used in
1603% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
1604%
1605% This all needs generalizing, badly.
1606%
1607\def\textfonts{%
1608  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
1609  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
1610  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
1611  \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
1612  \def\curfontsize{text}%
1613  \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1614  \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
1615\def\titlefonts{%
1616  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
1617  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
1618  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
1619  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
1620  \def\curfontsize{title}%
1621  \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
1622  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
1623\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
1624\def\chapfonts{%
1625  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
1626  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
1627  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
1628  \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
1629  \def\curfontsize{chap}%
1630  \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
1631  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
1632\def\secfonts{%
1633  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
1634  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
1635  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
1636  \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
1637  \def\curfontsize{sec}%
1638  \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
1639  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
1640\def\subsecfonts{%
1641  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
1642  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
1643  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
1644  \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
1645  \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
1646  \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
1647  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
1648\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
1649\def\reducedfonts{%
1650  \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
1651  \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
1652  \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
1653  \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
1654  \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
1655  \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1656  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1657\def\smallfonts{%
1658  \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
1659  \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
1660  \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
1661  \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
1662  \def\curfontsize{small}%
1663  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1664  \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
1665\def\smallerfonts{%
1666  \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
1667  \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
1668  \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
1669  \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
1670  \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
1671  \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
1672  \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
1673
1674% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
1675\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
1676
1677% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
1678% can fit this many characters:
1679%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
1680% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
1681%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
1682% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
1683% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
1684%
1685% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
1686%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
1687%
1688% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
1689% --karl, 24jan03.
1690
1691
1692% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
1693%
1694\textfonts \rm
1695
1696% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
1697\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
1698\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
1699
1700% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
1701\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
1702
1703% Fonts for short table of contents.
1704\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
1705\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}  % no cmb12
1706\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
1707\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
1708
1709%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
1710%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
1711
1712% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
1713% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
1714\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
1715                    \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
1716\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1717\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1718
1719% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
1720% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
1721\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1722
1723% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
1724% ttsl for book titles, do we?
1725\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
1726
1727\let\i=\smartitalic
1728\let\slanted=\smartslanted
1729\let\var=\smartslanted
1730\let\dfn=\smartslanted
1731\let\emph=\smartitalic
1732
1733% @b, explicit bold.
1734\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
1735\let\strong=\b
1736
1737% @sansserif, explicit sans.
1738\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
1739
1740% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
1741% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
1742% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
1743%
1744\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
1745\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
1746
1747% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
1748% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
1749% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
1750%
1751\catcode`@=11
1752  \def\frenchspacing{%
1753    \sfcode\dotChar  =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
1754    \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
1755  }
1756\catcode`@=\other
1757
1758\def\t#1{%
1759  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
1760  \null
1761}
1762\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
1763\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
1764\font\keysy=cmsy9
1765\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
1766  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
1767    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
1768     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
1769    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
1770  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
1771% The old definition, with no lozenge:
1772%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
1773\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
1774
1775% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
1776\let\file=\samp
1777\let\option=\samp
1778
1779% @code is a modification of @t,
1780% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
1781\def\tclose#1{%
1782  {%
1783    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
1784    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
1785    %
1786    % Switch to typewriter.
1787    \tt
1788    %
1789    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
1790    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
1791    %
1792    % Turn off hyphenation.
1793    \nohyphenation
1794    %
1795    \rawbackslash
1796    \frenchspacing
1797    #1%
1798  }%
1799  \null
1800}
1801
1802% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
1803% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
1804% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
1805
1806% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
1807% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
1808% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
1809% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
1810%  -- rms.
1811{
1812  \catcode`\-=\active
1813  \catcode`\_=\active
1814  %
1815  \global\def\code{\begingroup
1816    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
1817    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
1818    \codex
1819  }
1820}
1821
1822\def\realdash{-}
1823\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
1824\def\codeunder{%
1825  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
1826  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
1827  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
1828  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
1829  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
1830               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
1831             \else\normalunderscore \fi
1832             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
1833            {\_}%
1834}
1835\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
1836
1837% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
1838% then @kbd has no effect.
1839
1840% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
1841%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
1842%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
1843\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
1844  \def\arg{#1}%
1845  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
1846    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
1847  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
1848    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1849  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
1850    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
1851  \else
1852    \errhelp = \EMsimple
1853    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}%
1854  \fi\fi\fi
1855}
1856\def\worddistinct{distinct}
1857\def\wordexample{example}
1858\def\wordcode{code}
1859
1860% Default is `distinct.'
1861\kbdinputstyle distinct
1862
1863\def\xkey{\key}
1864\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
1865\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
1866\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
1867\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
1868
1869% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
1870\let\indicateurl=\code
1871\let\env=\code
1872\let\command=\code
1873
1874% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
1875% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
1876% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
1877% itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.  Perhaps eventually put in
1878% a hypertex \special here.
1879%
1880\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
1881\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
1882  \unsepspaces
1883  \pdfurl{#1}%
1884  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
1885  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1886    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
1887  \else
1888    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1889    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
1890      \ifpdf
1891        \unhbox0             % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
1892      \else
1893        \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
1894      \fi
1895    \else
1896      \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
1897    \fi
1898  \fi
1899  \endlink
1900\endgroup}
1901
1902% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
1903%
1904\let\url=\uref
1905
1906% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
1907% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
1908%
1909%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
1910\ifpdf
1911  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
1912  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
1913    \unsepspaces
1914    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
1915    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
1916    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
1917    \endlink
1918  \endgroup}
1919\else
1920  \let\email=\uref
1921\fi
1922
1923% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
1924% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
1925% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
1926% this property, we can check that font parameter.
1927%
1928\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
1929
1930% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
1931% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
1932%
1933\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
1934
1935\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
1936
1937% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
1938% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
1939% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
1940%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
1941
1942% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
1943\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
1944\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
1945\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
1946
1947% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
1948% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
1949% all-uppercase.
1950%
1951\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
1952\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
1953  {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
1954  \def\temp{#2}%
1955  \ifx\temp\empty \else
1956    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
1957  \fi
1958}
1959
1960% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
1961% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
1962%
1963\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
1964\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
1965  {\frenchspacing #1}%
1966  \def\temp{#2}%
1967  \ifx\temp\empty \else
1968    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
1969  \fi
1970}
1971
1972% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
1973%
1974\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
1975
1976% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
1977% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
1978% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
1979% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
1980% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
1981%
1982% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
1983% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
1984% font height.
1985%
1986% feymr - regular
1987% feymo - slanted
1988% feybr - bold
1989% feybo - bold slanted
1990%
1991% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
1992% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
1993% Hmm.
1994%
1995% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
1996% Hope not.
1997%
1998%
1999\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
2000\def\eurofont{%
2001  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
2002  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
2003  % installations which never need the symbold don't have to have the
2004  % font installed.
2005  %
2006  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
2007  % that to the current nominal size.
2008  %
2009  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
2010  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
2011  %
2012  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
2013  %
2014  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
2015    % bold:
2016    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
2017  \else
2018    % regular:
2019    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
2020  \fi
2021  \thiseurofont
2022}
2023
2024% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
2025% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
2026% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
2027%
2028\def\registeredsymbol{%
2029  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
2030               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
2031    }$%
2032}
2033
2034% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
2035%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
2036% so we'll define it if necessary.
2037%
2038\ifx\Orb\undefined
2039\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
2040\fi
2041
2042
2043\message{page headings,}
2044
2045\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
2046\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
2047
2048% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
2049\newif\ifseenauthor
2050\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
2051
2052% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
2053% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
2054%
2055\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
2056 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
2057\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
2058 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
2059
2060\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
2061        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
2062
2063\envdef\titlepage{%
2064  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
2065  \begingroup
2066    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
2067    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
2068    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
2069    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
2070    \finishedtitlepagetrue
2071    %
2072    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
2073    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
2074    \let\oldpage = \page
2075    \def\page{%
2076      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
2077	 \finishtitlepage
2078      \fi
2079      \let\page = \oldpage
2080      \page
2081      \null
2082    }%
2083}
2084
2085\def\Etitlepage{%
2086    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
2087	\finishtitlepage
2088    \fi
2089    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
2090    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
2091    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
2092    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
2093    \oldpage
2094  \endgroup
2095  %
2096  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
2097  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
2098  \HEADINGSon
2099  %
2100  % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
2101  \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
2102    \shortcontents
2103    \contents
2104    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
2105    \global\let\contents = \relax
2106  \fi
2107  %
2108  \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
2109    \contents
2110    \global\let\contents = \relax
2111    \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
2112  \fi
2113}
2114
2115\def\finishtitlepage{%
2116  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
2117  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
2118  \finishedtitlepagetrue
2119}
2120
2121%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
2122
2123\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
2124\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
2125
2126\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
2127		\let\tt=\authortt}
2128
2129\parseargdef\title{%
2130  \checkenv\titlepage
2131  \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
2132  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
2133  \finishedtitlepagefalse
2134  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
2135}
2136
2137\parseargdef\subtitle{%
2138  \checkenv\titlepage
2139  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
2140}
2141
2142% @author should come last, but may come many times.
2143% It can also be used inside @quotation.
2144%
2145\parseargdef\author{%
2146  \def\temp{\quotation}%
2147  \ifx\thisenv\temp
2148    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
2149  \else
2150    \checkenv\titlepage
2151    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
2152    {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
2153  \fi
2154}
2155
2156
2157%%% Set up page headings and footings.
2158
2159\let\thispage=\folio
2160
2161\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
2162\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
2163\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
2164\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
2165
2166% Now make TeX use those variables
2167\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
2168                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
2169\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
2170                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
2171\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
2172
2173% Commands to set those variables.
2174% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
2175% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
2176% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
2177% @evenfooting @thisfile||
2178% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
2179
2180
2181\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
2182\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2183\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2184\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2185
2186\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
2187\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2188\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2189\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2190
2191\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
2192
2193\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
2194\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2195\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2196\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
2197
2198\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
2199\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
2200\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
2201  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
2202  %
2203  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
2204  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
2205  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
2206  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
2207}
2208
2209\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
2210
2211
2212% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
2213% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
2214% @headings off         turns them off.
2215% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
2216% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
2217% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
2218% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
2219% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
2220% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
2221
2222\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
2223
2224\def\HEADINGSoff{%
2225\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2226\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
2227\HEADINGSoff
2228% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
2229% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
2230% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
2231% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
2232% edge of all pages.
2233\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
2234\global\pageno=1
2235\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2236\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2237\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
2238\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2239\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
2240}
2241\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2242
2243% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
2244% page number on top right.
2245\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
2246\global\pageno=1
2247\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2248\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2249\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2250\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2251\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2252}
2253\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
2254
2255\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
2256\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
2257\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
2258\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2259\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2260\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
2261\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2262\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
2263}
2264
2265\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
2266\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
2267\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
2268\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
2269\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2270\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
2271\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
2272}
2273
2274% Subroutines used in generating headings
2275% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
2276% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
2277% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
2278\ifx\today\undefined
2279\def\today{%
2280  \number\day\space
2281  \ifcase\month
2282  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
2283  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
2284  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
2285  \fi
2286  \space\number\year}
2287\fi
2288
2289% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
2290% It generates no output of its own.
2291\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
2292\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
2293
2294
2295\message{tables,}
2296% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
2297
2298% default indentation of table text
2299\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
2300% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
2301\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
2302% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
2303\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
2304
2305% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
2306\newdimen\itemmax
2307
2308% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
2309% these defs.
2310% They also define \itemindex
2311% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
2312
2313\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
2314
2315\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
2316
2317\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
2318\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
2319
2320\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
2321  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
2322  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
2323  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
2324  \itemindex{#1}%
2325  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
2326  %
2327  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
2328  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
2329  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
2330  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
2331  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
2332  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
2333    %
2334    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
2335    % but leave it ragged-right.
2336    \begingroup
2337      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
2338      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
2339      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
2340      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
2341    \endgroup
2342    %
2343    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
2344    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
2345    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
2346    %
2347    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
2348    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
2349    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
2350    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
2351    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
2352    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
2353    %
2354    \penalty 10001
2355    \endgroup
2356    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
2357  \else
2358    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
2359    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
2360    \noindent
2361    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
2362    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
2363    % eventually be printed.
2364    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
2365    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
2366    \unhbox0
2367    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
2368    \endgroup
2369    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
2370  \fi
2371}
2372
2373\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
2374\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
2375
2376% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
2377\envdef\table{%
2378  \let\itemindex\gobble
2379  \tablecheck{table}%
2380}
2381\envdef\ftable{%
2382  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
2383  \tablecheck{ftable}%
2384}
2385\envdef\vtable{%
2386  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
2387  \tablecheck{vtable}%
2388}
2389\def\tablecheck#1{%
2390  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
2391    \endgroup
2392    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
2393      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
2394    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
2395  \else
2396    \let\next\tablex
2397  \fi
2398  \next
2399}
2400\def\tablex#1{%
2401  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
2402  \parsearg\tabley
2403}
2404\def\tabley#1{%
2405  {%
2406    \makevalueexpandable
2407    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
2408    \expandafter
2409  }\temp \endtablez
2410}
2411\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
2412  \aboveenvbreak
2413  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
2414  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
2415  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
2416  \itemmax=\tableindent
2417  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
2418  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
2419  \exdentamount=\tableindent
2420  \parindent = 0pt
2421  \parskip = \smallskipamount
2422  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
2423  \let\item = \internalBitem
2424  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
2425}
2426\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
2427\let\Eftable\Etable
2428\let\Evtable\Etable
2429\let\Eitemize\Etable
2430\let\Eenumerate\Etable
2431
2432% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
2433
2434\newcount \itemno
2435
2436\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
2437
2438\def\doitemize#1{%
2439  \aboveenvbreak
2440  \itemmax=\itemindent
2441  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
2442  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
2443  \exdentamount=\itemindent
2444  \parindent=0pt
2445  \parskip=\smallskipamount
2446  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
2447  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
2448  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
2449  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
2450  \let\item=\itemizeitem
2451}
2452
2453% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
2454%
2455\def\itemizeitem{%
2456  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
2457  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
2458  {%
2459   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
2460   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
2461   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
2462   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
2463   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
2464   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
2465   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
2466   % that's the theory.
2467   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
2468   \noindent
2469   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
2470   \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
2471  \flushcr
2472}
2473
2474% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
2475% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
2476%
2477\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
2478
2479% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
2480% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
2481% argument is the same as `1'.
2482%
2483\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
2484\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
2485  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
2486  \def\thearg{#1}%
2487  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
2488  %
2489  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
2490  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
2491  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
2492  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
2493  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
2494  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
2495  \ifx\rest\empty
2496    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
2497    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
2498    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
2499    %   not equal to itself.
2500    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
2501    %
2502    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
2503    % continuing to look for a <number>.
2504    %
2505    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
2506      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
2507    \else
2508      % It's a letter.
2509      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
2510        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
2511      \else
2512        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
2513      \fi
2514    \fi
2515  \else
2516    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
2517    \numericenumerate
2518  \fi
2519}
2520
2521% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
2522% given in \thearg.
2523%
2524\def\numericenumerate{%
2525  \itemno = \thearg
2526  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
2527}
2528
2529% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
2530\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
2531  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2532  \startenumeration{%
2533    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2534    \ifnum\itemno=0
2535      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2536                  alphabet}%
2537    \fi
2538    \char\lccode\itemno
2539  }%
2540}
2541
2542% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
2543\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
2544  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
2545  \startenumeration{%
2546    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
2547    \ifnum\itemno=0
2548      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
2549                  alphabet}
2550    \fi
2551    \char\uccode\itemno
2552  }%
2553}
2554
2555% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
2556% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
2557% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
2558%
2559\def\startenumeration#1{%
2560  \advance\itemno by -1
2561  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
2562}
2563
2564% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
2565% to @enumerate.
2566%
2567\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
2568\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
2569\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2570\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
2571
2572
2573% @multitable macros
2574% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
2575%
2576% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
2577% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
2578% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
2579% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
2580
2581% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
2582
2583% To make preamble:
2584%
2585% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
2586%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
2587%   @item ...
2588%
2589%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
2590%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
2591%   columns as desired.
2592
2593
2594% Or use a template:
2595%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2596%   @item ...
2597%   using the widest term desired in each column.
2598
2599% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
2600% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
2601% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
2602% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
2603
2604% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
2605% if they are.
2606
2607% Sample multitable:
2608
2609%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
2610%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
2611%   @item
2612%   first col stuff
2613%   @tab
2614%   second col stuff
2615%   @tab
2616%   third col
2617%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
2618%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
2619%
2620%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
2621%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
2622%   @end multitable
2623
2624% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
2625% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
2626% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
2627% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
2628% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
2629%                                                            to baseline.
2630%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
2631%
2632\newskip\multitableparskip
2633\newskip\multitableparindent
2634\newdimen\multitablecolspace
2635\newskip\multitablelinespace
2636\multitableparskip=0pt
2637\multitableparindent=6pt
2638\multitablecolspace=12pt
2639\multitablelinespace=0pt
2640
2641% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
2642%
2643\let\endsetuptable\relax
2644\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
2645\let\columnfractions\relax
2646\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
2647\newif\ifsetpercent
2648
2649% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
2650% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
2651%
2652\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
2653  \global\advance\colcount by 1
2654  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
2655  \setuptable
2656}
2657
2658\newcount\colcount
2659\def\setuptable#1{%
2660  \def\firstarg{#1}%
2661  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
2662    \let\go = \relax
2663  \else
2664    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
2665      \global\setpercenttrue
2666    \else
2667      \ifsetpercent
2668         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
2669      \else
2670         \global\advance\colcount by 1
2671         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
2672                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
2673         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
2674      \fi
2675    \fi
2676    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
2677      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
2678      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
2679      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
2680    \else
2681      \let\go = \setuptable
2682    \fi%
2683  \fi
2684  \go
2685}
2686
2687% multitable-only commands.
2688%
2689% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
2690% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
2691% of an alignment entry.  Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
2692\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
2693%
2694% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
2695% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
2696% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
2697%					--karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
2698\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
2699
2700% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
2701%
2702\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
2703%
2704\envdef\multitable{%
2705  \vskip\parskip
2706  \startsavinginserts
2707  %
2708  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
2709  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
2710  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
2711  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
2712  \def\item{\crcr}%
2713  %
2714  \tolerance=9500
2715  \hbadness=9500
2716  \setmultitablespacing
2717  \parskip=\multitableparskip
2718  \parindent=\multitableparindent
2719  \overfullrule=0pt
2720  \global\colcount=0
2721  %
2722  \everycr = {%
2723    \noalign{%
2724      \global\everytab={}%
2725      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
2726      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
2727      \checkinserts
2728      % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
2729      %\filbreak
2730	% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
2731	% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the
2732	% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
2733    }%
2734  }%
2735  %
2736  \parsearg\domultitable
2737}
2738\def\domultitable#1{%
2739  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
2740  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
2741  %
2742  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
2743  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
2744  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
2745  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
2746  \halign\bgroup &%
2747    \global\advance\colcount by 1
2748    \multistrut
2749    \vtop{%
2750      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
2751      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
2752      %
2753      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
2754      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
2755      % the first one.
2756      %
2757      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
2758      % to the width of each template entry.
2759      %
2760      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
2761      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
2762      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
2763      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
2764      %
2765      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
2766      \rightskip=0pt
2767      \ifnum\colcount=1
2768	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
2769	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
2770      \else
2771	\ifsetpercent \else
2772	  % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
2773	  % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
2774	  \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
2775	\fi
2776       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
2777      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
2778      \fi
2779      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
2780      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
2781      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
2782      % For example:
2783      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
2784      % @item @code{#}
2785      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
2786      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
2787      % marking characters.
2788      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
2789    }\cr
2790}
2791\def\Emultitable{%
2792  \crcr
2793  \egroup % end the \halign
2794  \global\setpercentfalse
2795}
2796
2797\def\setmultitablespacing{%
2798  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
2799  %
2800  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
2801  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
2802  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
2803  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
2804\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
2805\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
2806\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
2807\fi
2808%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
2809%% table. If not, do nothing.
2810%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
2811\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
2812\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2813\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2814                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
2815\fi%
2816\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
2817\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
2818\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
2819                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
2820\fi}
2821
2822
2823\message{conditionals,}
2824
2825% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
2826% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
2827% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
2828% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
2829% attempt to close an environment group.
2830%
2831\def\makecond#1{%
2832  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
2833  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
2834}
2835\makecond{iftex}
2836\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
2837\makecond{ifnothtml}
2838\makecond{ifnotinfo}
2839\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
2840\makecond{ifnotxml}
2841
2842% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
2843%
2844\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
2845\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
2846\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
2847\def\html{\doignore{html}}
2848\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
2849\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
2850\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
2851\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
2852\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
2853\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
2854\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
2855\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
2856\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
2857
2858% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
2859%
2860% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
2861\newcount\doignorecount
2862
2863\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
2864  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
2865  \catcode`\@ = \other
2866  \catcode`\{ = \other
2867  \catcode`\} = \other
2868  %
2869  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
2870  \spaceisspace
2871  %
2872  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
2873  \doignorecount = 0
2874  %
2875  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
2876  \dodoignore{#1}%
2877}
2878
2879{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
2880  \obeylines %
2881  %
2882  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
2883    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
2884    %
2885    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line
2886    % by itself.
2887    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
2888    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
2889    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
2890    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
2891    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
2892    %
2893    % And now expand that command.
2894    \obeylines %
2895    \doignoretext ^^M%
2896  }%
2897}
2898
2899\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
2900  \def\temp{#1}%
2901  \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found.
2902    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
2903  \else					% Found a nested condition, ...
2904    \advance\doignorecount by 1
2905    \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.
2906    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
2907  \fi
2908  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
2909}
2910
2911% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
2912%
2913\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
2914  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.
2915    \let\next\enddoignore
2916  \else				% Still inside a nested condition.
2917    \advance\doignorecount by -1
2918    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
2919  \fi
2920  \next
2921}
2922
2923% Finish off ignored text.
2924\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
2925
2926
2927% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
2928% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
2929%
2930% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
2931% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
2932% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
2933% didn't need it.
2934% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
2935%
2936\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
2937\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
2938  {%
2939    \makevalueexpandable
2940    \def\temp{#2}%
2941    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
2942    \ifx\temp\empty
2943      \next{}%
2944    \else
2945      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
2946    \fi
2947  }%
2948}
2949% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
2950\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
2951
2952% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
2953%
2954\parseargdef\clear{%
2955  {%
2956    \makevalueexpandable
2957    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
2958  }%
2959}
2960
2961% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
2962\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
2963\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
2964{
2965  \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
2966  %
2967  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
2968    \let\value = \expandablevalue
2969    % We don't want these characters active, ...
2970    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
2971    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
2972    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
2973    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
2974    \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
2975  }
2976}
2977
2978% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
2979% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
2980% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
2981% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
2982% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
2983% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
2984% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
2985%
2986\def\expandablevalue#1{%
2987  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
2988    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
2989    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
2990  \else
2991    \csname SET#1\endcsname
2992  \fi
2993}
2994
2995% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
2996% with @set.
2997%
2998% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
2999%
3000\makecond{ifset}
3001\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
3002\def\doifset#1#2{%
3003  {%
3004    \makevalueexpandable
3005    \let\next=\empty
3006    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
3007      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
3008    \fi
3009    \expandafter
3010  }\next
3011}
3012\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
3013
3014% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
3015% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
3016%
3017% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
3018% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
3019% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
3020%
3021\makecond{ifclear}
3022\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
3023\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
3024
3025% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
3026% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
3027\let\dircategory=\comment
3028
3029% @defininfoenclose.
3030\let\definfoenclose=\comment
3031
3032
3033\message{indexing,}
3034% Index generation facilities
3035
3036% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
3037% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
3038\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
3039
3040% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
3041% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
3042% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
3043% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
3044% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
3045% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
3046% for the sake of vms.
3047%
3048\def\newindex#1{%
3049  \iflinks
3050    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
3051    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
3052  \fi
3053  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
3054    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
3055}
3056
3057% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
3058%
3059\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
3060
3061% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
3062%
3063\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
3064%
3065\def\newcodeindex#1{%
3066  \iflinks
3067    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
3068    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
3069  \fi
3070  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
3071    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
3072}
3073
3074
3075% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
3076% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
3077%
3078% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
3079% inside @code.
3080%
3081\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
3082\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
3083
3084% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
3085% #3 the target index (bar).
3086\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
3087  % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
3088  % closing the target index.
3089  \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
3090    % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
3091    % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
3092    \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
3093    \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
3094  \fi
3095  % redefine \fooindfile:
3096  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
3097  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
3098  % redefine \fooindex:
3099  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
3100}
3101
3102% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
3103% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
3104%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
3105
3106% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
3107% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
3108
3109% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
3110% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
3111
3112\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
3113\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
3114
3115% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
3116\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
3117\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
3118
3119% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
3120% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
3121% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
3122%
3123\def\indexdummies{%
3124  \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
3125  \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
3126  % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
3127  % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
3128  % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
3129  \let\{ = \mylbrace
3130  \let\} = \myrbrace
3131  %
3132  % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
3133  % effectively preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control
3134  % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
3135  % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
3136  % from whatever follows.
3137  %
3138  % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
3139  % space.
3140  %
3141  % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
3142  % those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
3143  % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
3144  %
3145  \def\definedummyword##1{%
3146    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
3147  }%
3148  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
3149    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
3150  }%
3151  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
3152  %
3153  % Do the redefinitions.
3154  \commondummies
3155}
3156
3157% For the aux file, @ is the escape character.  So we want to redefine
3158% everything using @ instead of \realbackslash.  When everything uses
3159% @, this will be simpler.
3160%
3161\def\atdummies{%
3162  \def\@{@@}%
3163  \def\ {@ }%
3164  \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
3165  \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
3166  %
3167  % (See comments in \indexdummies.)
3168  \def\definedummyword##1{%
3169    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
3170  }%
3171  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
3172    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
3173  }%
3174  \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
3175  %
3176  % Do the redefinitions.
3177  \commondummies
3178}
3179
3180% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.  \definedummyword and
3181% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
3182%
3183\def\commondummies{%
3184  %
3185  \normalturnoffactive
3186  %
3187  \commondummiesnofonts
3188  %
3189  \definedummyletter{_}%
3190  %
3191  % Non-English letters.
3192  \definedummyword{AA}%
3193  \definedummyword{AE}%
3194  \definedummyword{L}%
3195  \definedummyword{OE}%
3196  \definedummyword{O}%
3197  \definedummyword{aa}%
3198  \definedummyword{ae}%
3199  \definedummyword{l}%
3200  \definedummyword{oe}%
3201  \definedummyword{o}%
3202  \definedummyword{ss}%
3203  \definedummyword{exclamdown}%
3204  \definedummyword{questiondown}%
3205  \definedummyword{ordf}%
3206  \definedummyword{ordm}%
3207  %
3208  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
3209  \definedummyword{bf}%
3210  \definedummyword{gtr}%
3211  \definedummyword{hat}%
3212  \definedummyword{less}%
3213  \definedummyword{sf}%
3214  \definedummyword{sl}%
3215  \definedummyword{tclose}%
3216  \definedummyword{tt}%
3217  %
3218  \definedummyword{LaTeX}%
3219  \definedummyword{TeX}%
3220  %
3221  % Assorted special characters.
3222  \definedummyword{bullet}%
3223  \definedummyword{comma}%
3224  \definedummyword{copyright}%
3225  \definedummyword{registeredsymbol}%
3226  \definedummyword{dots}%
3227  \definedummyword{enddots}%
3228  \definedummyword{equiv}%
3229  \definedummyword{error}%
3230  \definedummyword{euro}%
3231  \definedummyword{expansion}%
3232  \definedummyword{minus}%
3233  \definedummyword{pounds}%
3234  \definedummyword{point}%
3235  \definedummyword{print}%
3236  \definedummyword{result}%
3237  %
3238  % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
3239  % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
3240  \makevalueexpandable
3241  %
3242  % Normal spaces, not active ones.
3243  \unsepspaces
3244  %
3245  % No macro expansion.
3246  \turnoffmacros
3247}
3248
3249% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
3250%
3251% Better have this without active chars.
3252{
3253  \catcode`\~=\other
3254  \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{%
3255    % Control letters and accents.
3256    \definedummyletter{!}%
3257    \definedummyaccent{"}%
3258    \definedummyaccent{'}%
3259    \definedummyletter{*}%
3260    \definedummyaccent{,}%
3261    \definedummyletter{.}%
3262    \definedummyletter{/}%
3263    \definedummyletter{:}%
3264    \definedummyaccent{=}%
3265    \definedummyletter{?}%
3266    \definedummyaccent{^}%
3267    \definedummyaccent{`}%
3268    \definedummyaccent{~}%
3269    \definedummyword{u}%
3270    \definedummyword{v}%
3271    \definedummyword{H}%
3272    \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
3273    \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
3274    \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
3275    \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
3276    \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
3277    \definedummyword{dotless}%
3278    %
3279    % Texinfo font commands.
3280    \definedummyword{b}%
3281    \definedummyword{i}%
3282    \definedummyword{r}%
3283    \definedummyword{sc}%
3284    \definedummyword{t}%
3285    %
3286    % Commands that take arguments.
3287    \definedummyword{acronym}%
3288    \definedummyword{cite}%
3289    \definedummyword{code}%
3290    \definedummyword{command}%
3291    \definedummyword{dfn}%
3292    \definedummyword{emph}%
3293    \definedummyword{env}%
3294    \definedummyword{file}%
3295    \definedummyword{kbd}%
3296    \definedummyword{key}%
3297    \definedummyword{math}%
3298    \definedummyword{option}%
3299    \definedummyword{samp}%
3300    \definedummyword{strong}%
3301    \definedummyword{tie}%
3302    \definedummyword{uref}%
3303    \definedummyword{url}%
3304    \definedummyword{var}%
3305    \definedummyword{verb}%
3306    \definedummyword{w}%
3307  }
3308}
3309
3310% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
3311% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
3312% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
3313% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
3314%
3315\def\indexnofonts{%
3316  % Accent commands should become @asis.
3317  \def\definedummyaccent##1{%
3318    \expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis
3319  }%
3320  % We can just ignore other control letters.
3321  \def\definedummyletter##1{%
3322    \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{}%
3323  }%
3324  % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
3325  \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
3326  %
3327  \commondummiesnofonts
3328  %
3329  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
3330  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
3331  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
3332  %\let\tt=\asis
3333  %
3334  \def\ { }%
3335  \def\@{@}%
3336  % how to handle braces?
3337  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
3338  %
3339  % Non-English letters.
3340  \def\AA{AA}%
3341  \def\AE{AE}%
3342  \def\L{L}%
3343  \def\OE{OE}%
3344  \def\O{O}%
3345  \def\aa{aa}%
3346  \def\ae{ae}%
3347  \def\l{l}%
3348  \def\oe{oe}%
3349  \def\o{o}%
3350  \def\ss{ss}%
3351  \def\exclamdown{!}%
3352  \def\questiondown{?}%
3353  \def\ordf{a}%
3354  \def\ordm{o}%
3355  %
3356  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
3357  \def\TeX{TeX}%
3358  %
3359  % Assorted special characters.
3360  % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
3361  \def\bullet{bullet}%
3362  \def\comma{,}%
3363  \def\copyright{copyright}%
3364  \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
3365  \def\dots{...}%
3366  \def\enddots{...}%
3367  \def\equiv{==}%
3368  \def\error{error}%
3369  \def\euro{euro}%
3370  \def\expansion{==>}%
3371  \def\minus{-}%
3372  \def\pounds{pounds}%
3373  \def\point{.}%
3374  \def\print{-|}%
3375  \def\result{=>}%
3376  %
3377  % Don't write macro names.
3378  \emptyusermacros
3379}
3380
3381\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
3382\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
3383
3384% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
3385% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
3386\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
3387
3388% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
3389% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
3390% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
3391% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
3392%
3393\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
3394  \iflinks
3395  {%
3396    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
3397    \toks0 = {#2}%
3398    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
3399    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
3400    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
3401      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
3402    \fi
3403    %
3404    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
3405    %
3406    \ifvmode
3407      \dosubindsanitize
3408    \else
3409      \dosubindwrite
3410    \fi
3411  }%
3412  \fi
3413}
3414
3415% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
3416%
3417\def\dosubindwrite{%
3418  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
3419  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
3420    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
3421  \fi
3422  %
3423  % Remember, we are within a group.
3424  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
3425  \escapechar=`\\
3426  \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
3427      % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
3428  %
3429  % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
3430  % get the string to sort by.
3431  {\indexnofonts
3432   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
3433   \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
3434  }%
3435  %
3436  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
3437  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
3438  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
3439  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
3440  % sorted result.
3441  \edef\temp{%
3442    \write\writeto{%
3443      \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
3444  }%
3445  \temp
3446}
3447
3448% Take care of unwanted page breaks:
3449%
3450% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
3451% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
3452% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
3453% \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
3454% like this:
3455% @end defun
3456% @tindex whatever
3457% @defun ...
3458% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
3459% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
3460% the previous defun.
3461%
3462% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
3463% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
3464%
3465% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
3466%
3467% But wait, there is a catch there:
3468% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
3469% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
3470% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
3471% representation of the skip.
3472%
3473% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
3474% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
3475%
3476\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
3477%
3478% ..., ready, GO:
3479%
3480\def\dosubindsanitize{%
3481  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
3482  \skip0 = \lastskip
3483  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
3484  \count255 = \lastpenalty
3485  %
3486  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
3487  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
3488  % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
3489  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
3490  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
3491  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
3492  \else
3493    \vskip-\skip0
3494  \fi
3495  %
3496  \dosubindwrite
3497  %
3498  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
3499    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
3500    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
3501    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
3502    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
3503    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
3504    %
3505    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
3506    %   @vindex index-whatever
3507    %   Description.
3508    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
3509    % and the "Description." paragraph.
3510    \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi
3511  \else
3512    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
3513    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
3514    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
3515    \nobreak\vskip\skip0
3516  \fi
3517}
3518
3519% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
3520%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
3521% or
3522%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
3523% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
3524% containing these kinds of lines:
3525%  \initial {c}
3526%     before the first topic whose initial is c
3527%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
3528%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
3529%  \primary {topic}
3530%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
3531%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
3532%     for each subtopic.
3533
3534% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
3535% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
3536
3537\def\findex {\fnindex}
3538\def\kindex {\kyindex}
3539\def\cindex {\cpindex}
3540\def\vindex {\vrindex}
3541\def\tindex {\tpindex}
3542\def\pindex {\pgindex}
3543
3544\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
3545{\obeylines %
3546\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
3547\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
3548
3549% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
3550
3551% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
3552% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
3553%
3554\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
3555  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
3556  %
3557  \smallfonts \rm
3558  \tolerance = 9500
3559  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
3560  %
3561  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
3562  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
3563  % \initial {@}
3564  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
3565  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
3566  \catcode`\@ = 11
3567  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
3568  \ifeof 1
3569    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
3570    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
3571    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
3572    % there is some text.
3573    \putwordIndexNonexistent
3574  \else
3575    %
3576    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
3577    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
3578    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
3579    \read 1 to \temp
3580    \ifeof 1
3581      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
3582    \else
3583      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
3584      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
3585      % to make right now.
3586      \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
3587      \catcode`\\ = 0
3588      \escapechar = `\\
3589      \begindoublecolumns
3590      \input \jobname.#1s
3591      \enddoublecolumns
3592    \fi
3593  \fi
3594  \closein 1
3595\endgroup}
3596
3597% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
3598% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
3599
3600\def\initial#1{{%
3601  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
3602  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
3603  %
3604  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
3605  \removelastskip
3606  %
3607  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
3608  \nobreak
3609  \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
3610  \penalty 0
3611  \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
3612  %
3613  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
3614  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
3615  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
3616  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
3617  %
3618  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
3619  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
3620  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
3621  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
3622  \nobreak
3623  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
3624}}
3625
3626% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
3627% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
3628% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
3629%
3630% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
3631%	\def\entry#1#2{...
3632% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
3633% @code, which sets - active.  This problem was fixed by a kludge---
3634% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
3635%
3636% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
3637%                                 --kasal, 21nov03
3638\def\entry{%
3639  \begingroup
3640    %
3641    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
3642    % affect previous text.
3643    \par
3644    %
3645    % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
3646    \parfillskip = 0in
3647    %
3648    % No extra space above this paragraph.
3649    \parskip = 0in
3650    %
3651    % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
3652    \finalhyphendemerits = 0
3653    %
3654    % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
3655    % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
3656    % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
3657    % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
3658    % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
3659    %
3660    % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
3661    % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
3662    \hangindent = 2em
3663    %
3664    % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
3665    % with blank space.
3666    \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
3667    %
3668    % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
3669    % columns.
3670    \vskip 0pt plus1pt
3671    %
3672    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
3673    \afterassignment\doentry
3674    \let\temp =
3675}
3676\def\doentry{%
3677    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
3678      \noindent
3679      \aftergroup\finishentry
3680      % And now comes the text of the entry.
3681}
3682\def\finishentry#1{%
3683    % #1 is the page number.
3684    %
3685    % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
3686    % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
3687    % cursed by a Unix daemon.
3688    \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
3689    \def\tempb{#1}%
3690    \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
3691    \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
3692    \ifx\tempc\tempd
3693      \ %
3694    \else
3695      %
3696      % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
3697      % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
3698      % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
3699      \hfil\penalty50
3700      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
3701      %
3702      % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
3703      % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
3704      % \hbox ensues.
3705      \ifpdf
3706	\pdfgettoks#1.%
3707	\ \the\toksA
3708      \else
3709	\ #1%
3710      \fi
3711    \fi
3712    \par
3713  \endgroup
3714}
3715
3716% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
3717\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
3718  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
3719
3720\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
3721
3722\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
3723\def\secondary#1#2{{%
3724  \parfillskip=0in
3725  \parskip=0in
3726  \hangindent=1in
3727  \hangafter=1
3728  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
3729  \ifpdf
3730    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
3731  \else
3732    #2
3733  \fi
3734  \par
3735}}
3736
3737% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
3738% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
3739% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
3740\catcode`\@=11
3741
3742\newbox\partialpage
3743\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
3744
3745\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
3746  % Grab any single-column material above us.
3747  \output = {%
3748    %
3749    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
3750    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
3751    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
3752    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
3753    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
3754    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
3755    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
3756    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
3757      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
3758    \fi
3759    %
3760    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
3761      % Unvbox the main output page.
3762      \unvbox\PAGE
3763      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
3764    }%
3765  }%
3766  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
3767  %
3768  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
3769  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
3770  %
3771  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
3772  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
3773  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
3774  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
3775  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
3776  %
3777  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
3778  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
3779  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
3780  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
3781  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
3782  %
3783  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
3784  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
3785  % been clobbered.
3786  %
3787  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
3788    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
3789    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
3790  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3791  %
3792  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
3793  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
3794  \vsize = 2\vsize
3795}
3796
3797% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
3798% the last.
3799%
3800\def\doublecolumnout{%
3801  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
3802  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
3803  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
3804  % previous page.
3805  \dimen@ = \vsize
3806  \divide\dimen@ by 2
3807  \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
3808  %
3809  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
3810  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
3811  \onepageout\pagesofar
3812  \unvbox255
3813  \penalty\outputpenalty
3814}
3815%
3816% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
3817% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
3818\def\pagesofar{%
3819  \unvbox\partialpage
3820  %
3821  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
3822  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
3823  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
3824}
3825%
3826% All done with double columns.
3827\def\enddoublecolumns{%
3828  \output = {%
3829    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave it on the
3830    % current page, no automatic page break.
3831    \balancecolumns
3832    %
3833    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
3834    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
3835    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
3836    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
3837    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
3838    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
3839    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
3840    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
3841  }%
3842  \eject
3843  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
3844  %
3845  % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
3846  % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
3847  % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
3848  % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
3849  \pagegoal = \vsize
3850}
3851%
3852% Called at the end of the double column material.
3853\def\balancecolumns{%
3854  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
3855  \dimen@ = \ht0
3856  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
3857  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
3858  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
3859  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
3860  \splittopskip = \topskip
3861  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
3862  {%
3863    \vbadness = 10000
3864    \loop
3865      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
3866      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
3867    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
3868      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
3869    \repeat
3870  }%
3871  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
3872  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
3873  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
3874  %
3875  \pagesofar
3876}
3877\catcode`\@ = \other
3878
3879
3880\message{sectioning,}
3881% Chapters, sections, etc.
3882
3883% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course.  But we count the unnumbered
3884% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
3885% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
3886% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
3887% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
3888\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
3889\newcount\chapno
3890\newcount\secno        \secno=0
3891\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
3892\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
3893
3894% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
3895\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
3896%
3897% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
3898% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
3899% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
3900% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
3901%
3902\def\appendixletter{%
3903  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
3904  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
3905  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
3906  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
3907  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
3908  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
3909  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
3910  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
3911  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
3912  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
3913  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
3914  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
3915  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
3916  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
3917  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
3918  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
3919  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
3920  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
3921  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
3922  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
3923  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
3924  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
3925  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
3926  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
3927  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
3928  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
3929  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
3930  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
3931  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
3932  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
3933  \else\char\the\appendixno
3934  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
3935  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
3936
3937% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
3938% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
3939% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
3940\def\thischapter{}
3941\def\thissection{}
3942
3943\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
3944\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
3945
3946% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
3947\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
3948\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
3949
3950% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
3951\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
3952\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
3953
3954% we only have subsub.
3955\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
3956%
3957% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
3958% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
3959\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
3960%
3961% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
3962% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
3963\def\chapheadtype{N}
3964
3965% Choose a heading macro
3966% #1 is heading type
3967% #2 is heading level
3968% #3 is text for heading
3969\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
3970  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
3971  \absseclevel=#2
3972  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
3973  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
3974  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
3975    \absseclevel = 0
3976  \else
3977    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
3978      \absseclevel = 3
3979    \fi
3980  \fi
3981  % The heading type:
3982  \def\headtype{#1}%
3983  \if \headtype U%
3984    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
3985      \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
3986    \fi
3987  \else
3988    % Check for appendix sections:
3989    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
3990      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
3991    \else
3992      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
3993	\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
3994      \fi\fi
3995    \fi
3996    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
3997    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
3998      \def\headtype{U}%
3999    \else
4000      \chardef\unmlevel = 3
4001    \fi
4002  \fi
4003  % Now print the heading:
4004  \if \headtype U%
4005    \ifcase\absseclevel
4006	\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
4007    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
4008    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
4009    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4010    \fi
4011  \else
4012    \if \headtype A%
4013      \ifcase\absseclevel
4014	  \appendixzzz{#3}%
4015      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
4016      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
4017      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4018      \fi
4019    \else
4020      \ifcase\absseclevel
4021	  \chapterzzz{#3}%
4022      \or \seczzz{#3}%
4023      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
4024      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
4025      \fi
4026    \fi
4027  \fi
4028  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
4029}
4030
4031% an interface:
4032\def\numhead{\genhead N}
4033\def\apphead{\genhead A}
4034\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
4035
4036% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
4037% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
4038%
4039% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
4040% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
4041\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
4042%
4043\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
4044\def\chapterzzz#1{%
4045  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
4046  % as an @include file.
4047  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4048    \global\advance\chapno by 1
4049  %
4050  % Used for \float.
4051  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
4052  \resetallfloatnos
4053  %
4054  \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
4055  %
4056  % Write the actual heading.
4057  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
4058  %
4059  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
4060  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
4061  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
4062  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
4063}
4064
4065\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
4066\def\appendixzzz#1{%
4067  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4068    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
4069  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
4070  \resetallfloatnos
4071  %
4072  \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
4073  \message{\appendixnum}%
4074  %
4075  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
4076  %
4077  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
4078  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
4079  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
4080}
4081
4082\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
4083\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
4084  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
4085    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
4086  %
4087  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
4088  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
4089  \resetallfloatnos
4090  %
4091  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
4092  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
4093  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
4094  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
4095  % to be executed, not expanded).
4096  %
4097  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
4098  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
4099  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
4100  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
4101  % the toc entries.)
4102  \toks0 = {#1}%
4103  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
4104  %
4105  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
4106  %
4107  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
4108  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
4109  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
4110}
4111
4112% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
4113\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
4114  % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
4115  % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
4116  % Thus we are safer this way:		--kasal, 24feb04
4117  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
4118  \unnmhead0{#1}%
4119  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
4120}
4121
4122% @top is like @unnumbered.
4123\let\top\unnumbered
4124
4125% Sections.
4126\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
4127\def\seczzz#1{%
4128  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
4129  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
4130}
4131
4132\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
4133\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
4134  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
4135  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
4136}
4137\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
4138
4139\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
4140\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
4141  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
4142  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
4143}
4144
4145% Subsections.
4146\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
4147\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
4148  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4149  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4150}
4151
4152\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
4153\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
4154  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4155  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
4156                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4157}
4158
4159\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
4160\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
4161  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
4162  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
4163                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
4164}
4165
4166% Subsubsections.
4167\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
4168\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
4169  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4170  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
4171                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4172}
4173
4174\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
4175\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
4176  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4177  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
4178                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4179}
4180
4181\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
4182\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
4183  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
4184  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
4185                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
4186}
4187
4188% These macros control what the section commands do, according
4189% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
4190% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
4191\let\section = \numberedsec
4192\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
4193\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
4194
4195% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
4196
4197% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
4198%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
4199%          overlong headings to fold.
4200%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
4201%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
4202%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
4203%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
4204
4205
4206\def\majorheading{%
4207  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
4208  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
4209}
4210
4211\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
4212\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
4213  {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4214                    \parindent=0pt\raggedright
4215                    \rm #1\hfill}}%
4216  \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
4217  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
4218}
4219
4220% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
4221\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4222  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4223\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4224  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4225\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
4226  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
4227
4228% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
4229% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
4230% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
4231
4232%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
4233\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
4234
4235%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
4236% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
4237
4238\newskip\chapheadingskip
4239
4240\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
4241\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
4242\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
4243
4244\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
4245
4246\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
4247\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
4248\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
4249\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
4250
4251\def\CHAPPAGon{%
4252\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
4253\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
4254\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
4255\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
4256
4257\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
4258\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
4259\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
4260\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
4261\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
4262
4263\CHAPPAGon
4264
4265% Chapter opening.
4266%
4267% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
4268% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
4269%
4270% To test against our argument.
4271\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
4272\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
4273\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
4274%
4275\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
4276  \pchapsepmacro
4277  {%
4278    \chapfonts \rm
4279    %
4280    % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
4281    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
4282    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
4283    \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4284    \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
4285    %
4286    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
4287    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
4288    \def\temptype{#2}%
4289    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
4290      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4291      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
4292      \def\thischapter{#1}%
4293    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
4294      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
4295      \def\toctype{omit}%
4296      \xdef\thischapter{}%
4297    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
4298      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
4299      \def\toctype{app}%
4300      % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
4301      % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.  And we don't
4302      % use \thissection because that changes with each section.
4303      %
4304      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
4305                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
4306    \else
4307      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
4308      \def\toctype{numchap}%
4309      \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
4310                        \noexpand\thischaptername}%
4311    \fi\fi\fi
4312    %
4313    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
4314    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
4315    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
4316    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
4317    %
4318    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
4319    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
4320    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
4321    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
4322    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
4323    \donoderef{#2}%
4324    %
4325    % Typeset the actual heading.
4326    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
4327          \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
4328          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
4329  }%
4330  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
4331  \nobreak
4332}
4333
4334% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
4335\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
4336\def\centerparameters{%
4337  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
4338  \leftskip = \rightskip
4339  \parfillskip = 0pt
4340}
4341
4342
4343% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
4344% updating it with the new noderef stuff.  We'll see.  --karl, 11aug03.
4345%
4346\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
4347%
4348\def\unnchfopen #1{%
4349\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4350                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
4351                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
4352}
4353\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
4354\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
4355\par\penalty 5000 %
4356}
4357\def\centerchfopen #1{%
4358\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
4359                       \parindent=0pt
4360                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
4361}
4362\def\CHAPFopen{%
4363  \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
4364  \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
4365
4366
4367% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
4368% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
4369%
4370\newskip\secheadingskip
4371\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
4372
4373% Subsection titles.
4374\newskip\subsecheadingskip
4375\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
4376
4377% Subsubsection titles.
4378\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
4379\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
4380
4381
4382% Print any size, any type, section title.
4383%
4384% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
4385% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
4386% section number.
4387%
4388\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
4389  {%
4390    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
4391    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
4392    %
4393    % Insert space above the heading.
4394    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
4395    %
4396    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
4397    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
4398    \def\temptype{#3}%
4399    %
4400    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
4401      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4402      \def\toctype{unn}%
4403      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4404    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
4405      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
4406      % and don't redefine \thissection.
4407      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
4408      \def\toctype{omit}%
4409      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
4410    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
4411      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
4412      \def\toctype{app}%
4413      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4414    \else
4415      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
4416      \def\toctype{num}%
4417      \gdef\thissection{#1}%
4418    \fi\fi\fi
4419    %
4420    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chfplain.
4421    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
4422    %
4423    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
4424    % Again, see comments in \chfplain.
4425    \donoderef{#3}%
4426    %
4427    % Output the actual section heading.
4428    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
4429          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
4430          \unhbox0 #1}%
4431  }%
4432  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
4433  % Don't allow stretch, though.
4434  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
4435  %
4436  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
4437  % was followed by glue.
4438  \nobreak
4439  %
4440  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
4441  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
4442  % discardable item.)
4443  \vskip-\parskip
4444  %
4445  % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
4446  % 10000.  This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
4447  % section headings.  Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
4448  %
4449  %   @section sec-whatever
4450  %   @deffn def-whatever
4451  \penalty 10001
4452}
4453
4454
4455\message{toc,}
4456% Table of contents.
4457\newwrite\tocfile
4458
4459% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
4460% Called from @chapter, etc.
4461%
4462% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
4463% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
4464% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
4465% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
4466% destination to jump to.
4467%
4468% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
4469% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
4470% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
4471% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
4472%
4473\newif\iftocfileopened
4474\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
4475%
4476\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
4477  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
4478  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
4479    \iftocfileopened\else
4480      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
4481      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
4482    \fi
4483    %
4484    \iflinks
4485      \toks0 = {#2}%
4486      \toks2 = \expandafter{\lastnode}%
4487      \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}{#3}%
4488                               {\the\toks2}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
4489      \temp
4490    \fi
4491  \fi
4492  %
4493  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
4494  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
4495  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
4496  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
4497  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
4498  % `1', and two named `2'.
4499  \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
4500}
4501
4502\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
4503\newcount\savepageno
4504\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
4505
4506% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
4507%
4508\def\startcontents#1{%
4509  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
4510  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
4511  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
4512  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
4513  \contentsalignmacro
4514  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
4515  %
4516  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
4517  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
4518  \def\thischapter{}%
4519  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
4520  %
4521  \savepageno = \pageno
4522  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
4523    \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
4524    % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
4525    % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
4526    %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
4527    \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
4528    \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
4529    %
4530    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
4531    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
4532}
4533
4534
4535% Normal (long) toc.
4536\def\contents{%
4537  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
4538    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4539    \ifeof 1 \else
4540      \input \jobname.toc
4541    \fi
4542    \vfill \eject
4543    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4544    \ifeof 1 \else
4545      \pdfmakeoutlines
4546    \fi
4547    \closein 1
4548  \endgroup
4549  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4550  \global\pageno = \savepageno
4551}
4552
4553% And just the chapters.
4554\def\summarycontents{%
4555  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
4556    %
4557    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
4558    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
4559    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
4560    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
4561    \secfonts
4562    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
4563    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
4564    \rm
4565    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
4566    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
4567    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
4568    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
4569    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
4570    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4571    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4572    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4573    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4574    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4575    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
4576    \openin 1 \jobname.toc
4577    \ifeof 1 \else
4578      \input \jobname.toc
4579    \fi
4580    \closein 1
4581    \vfill \eject
4582    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
4583  \endgroup
4584  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
4585  \global\pageno = \savepageno
4586}
4587\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
4588
4589% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
4590% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
4591%
4592\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
4593  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
4594  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
4595  % But use \hss just in case.
4596  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
4597  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
4598  %
4599  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
4600  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
4601  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
4602  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
4603  % there are before deciding ...
4604  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
4605}
4606
4607% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
4608% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
4609% The last argument is the page number.
4610% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
4611
4612% Chapters, in the main contents.
4613\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4614%
4615% Chapters, in the short toc.
4616% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
4617\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
4618  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
4619}
4620
4621% Appendices, in the main contents.
4622% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
4623%
4624\def\appendixbox#1{%
4625  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
4626  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
4627  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
4628%
4629\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4630
4631% Unnumbered chapters.
4632\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
4633\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
4634
4635% Sections.
4636\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4637\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
4638\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
4639
4640% Subsections.
4641\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4642\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
4643\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
4644
4645% And subsubsections.
4646\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
4647\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
4648\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
4649
4650% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
4651% Same as \defaultparindent.
4652\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
4653
4654% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
4655% page number.
4656%
4657% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
4658% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
4659\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
4660   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
4661   \begingroup
4662     \chapentryfonts
4663     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4664   \endgroup
4665   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
4666}
4667
4668\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4669  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
4670  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4671\endgroup}
4672
4673\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4674  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
4675  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4676\endgroup}
4677
4678\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
4679  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
4680  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
4681\endgroup}
4682
4683% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
4684\let\tocentry = \entry
4685
4686% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
4687\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
4688
4689\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4690\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
4691
4692\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
4693\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
4694\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
4695\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
4696
4697
4698\message{environments,}
4699% @foo ... @end foo.
4700
4701% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
4702%
4703% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
4704% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
4705%
4706\def\point{$\star$}
4707\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
4708\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
4709\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
4710\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
4711
4712% The @error{} command.
4713% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
4714%
4715\newbox\errorbox
4716%
4717{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
4718\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
4719% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
4720\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
4721%
4722\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
4723   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
4724   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
4725   \vbox{%
4726      \hrule height\dimen2
4727      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
4728         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
4729         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
4730      \hrule height\dimen2}
4731    \hfil}
4732%
4733\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
4734
4735% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
4736% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
4737% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
4738
4739\envdef\tex{%
4740  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
4741  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
4742  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
4743  \catcode `\%=14
4744  \catcode `\+=\other
4745  \catcode `\"=\other
4746  \catcode `\|=\other
4747  \catcode `\<=\other
4748  \catcode `\>=\other
4749  \escapechar=`\\
4750  %
4751  \let\b=\ptexb
4752  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
4753  \let\c=\ptexc
4754  \let\,=\ptexcomma
4755  \let\.=\ptexdot
4756  \let\dots=\ptexdots
4757  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
4758  \let\!=\ptexexclam
4759  \let\i=\ptexi
4760  \let\indent=\ptexindent
4761  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
4762  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
4763  \let\+=\tabalign
4764  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
4765  \let\/=\ptexslash
4766  \let\*=\ptexstar
4767  \let\t=\ptext
4768  %
4769  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
4770  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
4771  \def\@{@}%
4772}
4773% There is no need to define \Etex.
4774
4775% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
4776% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
4777% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
4778
4779% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
4780\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
4781
4782% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
4783% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
4784% have any width.
4785\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
4786
4787% This space is always present above and below environments.
4788\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
4789
4790% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
4791% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
4792% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
4793% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
4794%
4795\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
4796  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
4797  % \sectionheading, q.v.
4798  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
4799    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
4800    \endgraf
4801    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
4802      \removelastskip
4803      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
4804      % or better ...
4805      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
4806      \vskip\envskipamount
4807    \fi
4808  \fi
4809}}
4810
4811\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
4812
4813% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
4814\let\nonarrowing=\relax
4815
4816% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
4817% environment contents.
4818\font\circle=lcircle10
4819\newdimen\circthick
4820\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
4821\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
4822\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
4823%
4824\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
4825\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
4826\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
4827\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
4828\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4829        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
4830        \hskip\rskip}}
4831\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
4832        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
4833        \hskip\rskip}}
4834%
4835\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
4836
4837\envdef\cartouche{%
4838  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
4839  \startsavinginserts
4840  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
4841  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
4842  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
4843  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
4844  \cartouter=\hsize
4845  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt	% allow for 3pt kerns on either
4846				% side, and for 6pt waste from
4847				% each corner char, and rule thickness
4848  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
4849  % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
4850  \let\nonarrowing=\comment
4851  \vbox\bgroup
4852      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
4853      \carttop
4854      \hbox\bgroup
4855	  \hskip\lskip
4856	  \vrule\kern3pt
4857	  \vbox\bgroup
4858	      \kern3pt
4859	      \hsize=\cartinner
4860	      \baselineskip=\normbskip
4861	      \lineskip=\normlskip
4862	      \parskip=\normpskip
4863	      \vskip -\parskip
4864	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
4865}
4866\def\Ecartouche{%
4867              \ifhmode\par\fi
4868	      \kern3pt
4869	  \egroup
4870	  \kern3pt\vrule
4871	  \hskip\rskip
4872      \egroup
4873      \cartbot
4874  \egroup
4875  \checkinserts
4876}
4877
4878
4879% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
4880% inside a group.
4881\def\nonfillstart{%
4882  \aboveenvbreak
4883  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
4884  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
4885  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
4886  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
4887  \parskip = 0pt
4888  \parindent = 0pt
4889  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
4890  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
4891  % at next level down.
4892  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
4893    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
4894    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
4895  \fi
4896  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
4897}
4898
4899% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
4900% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
4901% This affects the following displayed environments:
4902%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
4903%
4904\def\smallword{small}
4905\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
4906\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
4907\def\setnormaldispenv{%
4908  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
4909    \smallexamplefonts \rm
4910  \fi
4911}
4912\def\setsmalldispenv{%
4913  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
4914  \else
4915    \smallexamplefonts \rm
4916  \fi
4917}
4918
4919% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
4920% Let's do it by one command:
4921\def\makedispenv #1#2{
4922  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
4923  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
4924  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
4925  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
4926}
4927
4928% Define two synonyms:
4929\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
4930  \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
4931  \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
4932}
4933
4934% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
4935%
4936% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
4937% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
4938%
4939\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
4940  \nonfillstart
4941  \tt
4942  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
4943  \gobble       % eat return
4944}
4945
4946% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
4947%
4948\makedispenv {display}{%
4949  \nonfillstart
4950  \gobble
4951}
4952
4953% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
4954%
4955\makedispenv{format}{%
4956  \let\nonarrowing = t%
4957  \nonfillstart
4958  \gobble
4959}
4960
4961% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
4962\envdef\flushleft{%
4963  \let\nonarrowing = t%
4964  \nonfillstart
4965  \gobble
4966}
4967\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
4968
4969% @flushright.
4970%
4971\envdef\flushright{%
4972  \let\nonarrowing = t%
4973  \nonfillstart
4974  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
4975  \gobble
4976}
4977\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
4978
4979
4980% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
4981% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
4982% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
4983% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
4984%
4985\envdef\quotation{%
4986  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
4987  \parindent=0pt
4988  %
4989  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
4990  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
4991    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
4992    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
4993    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
4994    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
4995  \fi
4996  \parsearg\quotationlabel
4997}
4998
4999% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
5000% doing normal filling.
5001%
5002\def\Equotation{%
5003  \par
5004  \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
5005    % indent a bit.
5006    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
5007  \fi
5008  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
5009}
5010
5011% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
5012\def\quotationlabel#1{%
5013  \def\temp{#1}%
5014  \ifx\temp\empty \else
5015    {\bf #1: }%
5016  \fi
5017}
5018
5019
5020% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
5021% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
5022% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
5023% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
5024%
5025% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
5026%
5027% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
5028% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
5029% verbatim line.
5030\def\dospecials{%
5031  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
5032  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
5033  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
5034}
5035%
5036% [Knuth] p. 380
5037\def\uncatcodespecials{%
5038  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
5039%
5040% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
5041% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
5042\begingroup
5043  \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
5044\endgroup
5045%
5046% Setup for the @verb command.
5047%
5048% Eight spaces for a tab
5049\begingroup
5050  \catcode`\^^I=\active
5051  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
5052\endgroup
5053%
5054\def\setupverb{%
5055  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
5056  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
5057  \catcode`\`=\active
5058  \tabeightspaces
5059  % Respect line breaks,
5060  % print special symbols as themselves, and
5061  % make each space count
5062  % must do in this order:
5063  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
5064}
5065
5066% Setup for the @verbatim environment
5067%
5068% Real tab expansion
5069\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
5070%
5071\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
5072\begingroup
5073  \catcode`\^^I=\active
5074  \gdef\tabexpand{%
5075    \catcode`\^^I=\active
5076    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
5077      \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
5078      \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
5079      \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
5080      \advance\dimen0 by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
5081      \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
5082    }%
5083  }
5084\endgroup
5085\def\setupverbatim{%
5086  \nonfillstart
5087  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
5088  % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
5089  \tt
5090  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
5091  \catcode`\`=\active
5092  \tabexpand
5093  % Respect line breaks,
5094  % print special symbols as themselves, and
5095  % make each space count
5096  % must do in this order:
5097  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
5098  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
5099}
5100
5101% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
5102% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
5103% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
5104%
5105%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
5106%
5107% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
5108\begingroup
5109  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
5110  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
5111\endgroup
5112%
5113\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
5114%
5115%
5116% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
5117% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
5118%
5119%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
5120%
5121% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
5122% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
5123% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
5124%
5125% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
5126%
5127\begingroup
5128  \catcode`\ =\active
5129  \obeylines %
5130  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
5131  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
5132  % line in the output.
5133  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
5134  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
5135  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
5136\endgroup
5137%
5138\envdef\verbatim{%
5139    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
5140}
5141\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
5142
5143
5144% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
5145%
5146\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
5147%
5148\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
5149  {%
5150    \makevalueexpandable
5151    \setupverbatim
5152    \input #1
5153    \afterenvbreak
5154  }%
5155}
5156
5157% @copying ... @end copying.
5158% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
5159%
5160% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
5161% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
5162% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
5163% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
5164% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
5165% possible is very desirable.
5166%
5167\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
5168\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
5169%
5170\def\insertcopying{%
5171  \begingroup
5172    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
5173    \scanexp\copyingtext
5174  \endgroup
5175}
5176
5177\message{defuns,}
5178% @defun etc.
5179
5180\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
5181\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
5182\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
5183
5184% Start the processing of @deffn:
5185\def\startdefun{%
5186  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
5187    \medbreak
5188  \else
5189    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
5190    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
5191    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
5192    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
5193    % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
5194    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
5195    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
5196    %
5197    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
5198    %
5199    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
5200    % But do insert the glue.
5201    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
5202  \fi
5203  %
5204  \parindent=0in
5205  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
5206  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
5207}
5208
5209\def\dodefunx#1{%
5210  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
5211  \checkenv#1%
5212  %
5213  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
5214  % It's not a great place, though.
5215  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
5216  %
5217  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
5218  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
5219}
5220\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
5221
5222% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
5223%
5224\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
5225  \begingroup
5226    % call \deffnheader:
5227    #1#2 \endheader
5228    % common ending:
5229    \interlinepenalty = 10000
5230    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
5231    \endgraf
5232    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
5233    \penalty 10002  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
5234    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
5235    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
5236    \checkparencounts
5237  \endgroup
5238}
5239
5240\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
5241
5242% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
5243% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
5244%
5245\def\makedefun#1{%
5246  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
5247  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
5248    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
5249  \temp
5250}
5251
5252% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
5253%
5254% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
5255% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
5256%
5257\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
5258  \envdef#1{%
5259    \startdefun
5260    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
5261  }%
5262  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
5263  \def#3%
5264}
5265
5266%%% Untyped functions:
5267
5268% @deffn category name args
5269\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
5270
5271% @deffn category class name args
5272\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
5273
5274% \defopon {category on}class name args
5275\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5276
5277% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
5278%
5279\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
5280  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
5281  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
5282  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
5283}
5284
5285%%% Typed functions:
5286
5287% @deftypefn category type name args
5288\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
5289
5290% @deftypeop category class type name args
5291\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
5292
5293% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
5294\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5295
5296% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
5297%
5298\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
5299  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
5300  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
5301}
5302
5303%%% Typed variables:
5304
5305% @deftypevr category type var args
5306\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
5307
5308% @deftypecv category class type var args
5309\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
5310
5311% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
5312\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
5313
5314% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
5315%
5316\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
5317  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
5318  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
5319}
5320
5321%%% Untyped variables:
5322
5323% @defvr category var args
5324\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
5325
5326% @defcv category class var args
5327\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
5328
5329% \defcvof {category of}class var args
5330\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
5331
5332%%% Type:
5333% @deftp category name args
5334\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
5335  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
5336  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
5337}
5338
5339% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
5340\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
5341\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
5342\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
5343\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
5344\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
5345\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
5346\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
5347\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
5348\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
5349\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
5350\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
5351
5352% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
5353% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
5354% #2 is the return type, if any.
5355% #3 is the function name.
5356%
5357% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
5358%
5359\def\defname#1#2#3{%
5360  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
5361  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
5362  %
5363  % How we'll format the type name.  Putting it in brackets helps
5364  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
5365  % just below it.
5366  \def\temp{#1}%
5367  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
5368  %
5369  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
5370  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
5371  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
5372  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
5373  % The continuations:
5374  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
5375  % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
5376  \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
5377  %
5378  % Put the type name to the right margin.
5379  \noindent
5380  \hbox to 0pt{%
5381    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
5382    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
5383    \kern\leftskip
5384    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
5385  }%
5386  %
5387  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
5388  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
5389  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
5390  {%
5391    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
5392    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
5393    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
5394    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
5395    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
5396    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
5397    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
5398    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
5399    \df \tt
5400    \def\temp{#2}% return value type
5401    \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
5402    #3% output function name
5403  }%
5404  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
5405  %
5406  \boldbrax
5407  % arguments will be output next, if any.
5408}
5409
5410% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
5411% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
5412% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
5413% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
5414%
5415\def\defunargs#1{%
5416  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
5417  % tt for the names.
5418  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
5419  %
5420  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
5421  % want a way to get ttsl.  Let's try @var for that.
5422  \let\var=\ttslanted
5423  #1%
5424  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
5425}
5426
5427% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
5428%
5429\def\activeparens{%
5430  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
5431  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
5432  \catcode`\&=\active
5433}
5434
5435% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
5436\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
5437
5438% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
5439% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
5440% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
5441{
5442  \activeparens
5443  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
5444  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
5445  \global\let& = \&
5446
5447  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
5448  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
5449}
5450
5451\newcount\parencount
5452
5453% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
5454\newif\ifampseen
5455\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
5456
5457\def\parenfont{%
5458  \ifampseen
5459    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
5460    % otherwise use the default font.
5461    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
5462  \else
5463    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
5464    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
5465    \sf
5466  \fi
5467}
5468\def\infirstlevel#1{%
5469  \ifampseen
5470    \ifnum\parencount=1
5471      #1%
5472    \fi
5473  \fi
5474}
5475\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
5476
5477\def\opnr{%
5478  \global\advance\parencount by 1
5479  {\parenfont(}%
5480  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
5481}
5482\def\clnr{%
5483  {\parenfont)}%
5484  \infirstlevel \sl
5485  \global\advance\parencount by -1
5486}
5487
5488\newcount\brackcount
5489\def\lbrb{%
5490  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
5491  {\bf[}%
5492}
5493\def\rbrb{%
5494  {\bf]}%
5495  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
5496}
5497
5498\def\checkparencounts{%
5499  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
5500  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
5501}
5502\def\badparencount{%
5503  \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
5504  \global\parencount=0
5505}
5506\def\badbrackcount{%
5507  \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
5508  \global\brackcount=0
5509}
5510
5511
5512\message{macros,}
5513% @macro.
5514
5515% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
5516% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
5517\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
5518  \newwrite\macscribble
5519  \def\scantokens#1{%
5520    \toks0={#1}%
5521    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
5522    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
5523    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
5524    \input \jobname.tmp
5525  }
5526\fi
5527
5528\def\scanmacro#1{%
5529  \begingroup
5530    \newlinechar`\^^M
5531    \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
5532    % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
5533    % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
5534    % backslash to get it printed correctly.  Previously, we had
5535    % \catcode`\\=\other instead.  We'll see whether a problem appears
5536    % with macro expansion.				--kasal, 19aug04
5537    \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
5538    % ... and \example
5539    \spaceisspace
5540    %
5541    % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
5542    %
5543    % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
5544    %							--kasal, 29nov03
5545    \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
5546  \endgroup
5547}
5548
5549\def\scanexp#1{%
5550  \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
5551  \temp
5552}
5553
5554\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
5555\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
5556\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
5557\def\macrolist{}    % List of all defined macros in the form
5558                    % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
5559
5560% Utility routines.
5561% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
5562%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
5563% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
5564%
5565\def\cslet#1#2{%
5566  \expandafter\let
5567  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
5568  \csname#2\endcsname
5569}
5570
5571% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
5572% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
5573{\catcode`\@=11
5574\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
5575\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
5576\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
5577\def\unbrace#1{#1}
5578\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
5579}
5580
5581% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
5582{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
5583\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
5584\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
5585\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
5586}
5587
5588% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
5589% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
5590% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
5591
5592% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
5593% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
5594% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
5595
5596\def\scanctxt{%
5597  \catcode`\"=\other
5598  \catcode`\+=\other
5599  \catcode`\<=\other
5600  \catcode`\>=\other
5601  \catcode`\@=\other
5602  \catcode`\^=\other
5603  \catcode`\_=\other
5604  \catcode`\|=\other
5605  \catcode`\~=\other
5606}
5607
5608\def\scanargctxt{%
5609  \scanctxt
5610  \catcode`\\=\other
5611  \catcode`\^^M=\other
5612}
5613
5614\def\macrobodyctxt{%
5615  \scanctxt
5616  \catcode`\{=\other
5617  \catcode`\}=\other
5618  \catcode`\^^M=\other
5619  \usembodybackslash
5620}
5621
5622\def\macroargctxt{%
5623  \scanctxt
5624  \catcode`\\=\other
5625}
5626
5627% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
5628% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
5629% where N is the macro parameter number.
5630% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
5631% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
5632
5633{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
5634 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
5635 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
5636}
5637\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
5638
5639\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
5640\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
5641
5642\def\macroxxx#1{%
5643  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
5644  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
5645     \paramno=0%
5646  \else
5647     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
5648  \fi
5649  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
5650     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
5651  \else
5652     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
5653     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
5654     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
5655     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
5656     % Add the macroname to \macrolist
5657     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
5658     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
5659       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
5660  \fi
5661  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
5662  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
5663  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
5664  \fi}
5665
5666\parseargdef\unmacro{%
5667  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
5668    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
5669    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
5670    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
5671    \begingroup
5672      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
5673      \let\do\unmacrodo
5674      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
5675    \endgroup
5676  \else
5677    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
5678  \fi
5679}
5680
5681% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
5682% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
5683%
5684\def\unmacrodo#1{%
5685  \ifx#1\relax
5686    % remove this
5687  \else
5688    \noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
5689  \fi
5690}
5691
5692% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
5693% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
5694% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
5695\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
5696\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
5697\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
5698\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
5699
5700% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
5701% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
5702% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
5703% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
5704
5705% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
5706% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
5707% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
5708% it to # just before using the token list produced.
5709%
5710% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
5711% the macro is used.
5712
5713\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
5714        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
5715\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
5716  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
5717  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
5718    \advance\paramno by 1%
5719    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
5720        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
5721    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
5722  \fi\next}
5723
5724% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
5725% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
5726
5727\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
5728{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5729\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
5730{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
5731
5732% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
5733% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
5734% Much magic with \expandafter here.
5735% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
5736% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
5737\def\defmacro{%
5738  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
5739  \ifrecursive
5740    \ifcase\paramno
5741    % 0
5742      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5743        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5744    \or % 1
5745      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5746         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5747         \noexpand\braceorline
5748         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5749      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5750         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5751    \else % many
5752      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5753         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5754         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5755      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5756          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5757      \expandafter\expandafter
5758      \expandafter\xdef
5759      \expandafter\expandafter
5760        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5761          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
5762    \fi
5763  \else
5764    \ifcase\paramno
5765    % 0
5766      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5767        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5768        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5769    \or % 1
5770      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5771         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5772         \noexpand\braceorline
5773         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
5774      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
5775        \egroup
5776        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5777        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5778    \else % many
5779      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
5780         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
5781         \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
5782      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
5783          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
5784      \expandafter\expandafter
5785      \expandafter\xdef
5786      \expandafter\expandafter
5787      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
5788      \paramlist{%
5789          \egroup
5790          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
5791          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
5792    \fi
5793  \fi}
5794
5795\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
5796
5797% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
5798% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
5799% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
5800% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
5801\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
5802\def\braceorlinexxx{%
5803  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
5804    \expandafter\parsearg
5805  \fi \next}
5806
5807% We want to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
5808% expanded by \write.
5809\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
5810  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
5811
5812% For \indexnofonts, we need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the
5813% arguments (if present).  Of course this is not nearly correct, but it
5814% is the best we can do for now.  makeinfo does not expand macros in the
5815% argument to @deffn, which ends up writing an index entry, and texindex
5816% isn't prepared for an index sort entry that starts with \.
5817%
5818% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
5819% to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
5820% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
5821%
5822\def\emptyusermacros{\begingroup
5823  \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\noexpand\asis}%
5824  \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
5825
5826
5827% @alias.
5828% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
5829% sign.  Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
5830\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
5831\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
5832\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
5833  {%
5834    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
5835    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
5836  }%
5837  \next
5838}
5839
5840
5841\message{cross references,}
5842
5843\newwrite\auxfile
5844
5845\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
5846\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
5847
5848% @inforef is relatively simple.
5849\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
5850\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
5851  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
5852
5853% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
5854% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
5855% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
5856% @node foo , bar , ...
5857% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
5858%
5859\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
5860%
5861% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
5862% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
5863\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
5864\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
5865
5866\let\nwnode=\node
5867\let\lastnode=\empty
5868
5869% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
5870% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
5871%
5872\def\donoderef#1{%
5873  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
5874    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
5875    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
5876  \fi
5877}
5878
5879% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
5880%
5881\newcount\savesfregister
5882%
5883\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
5884\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
5885\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
5886
5887% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
5888% anchor), which consists of three parts:
5889% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
5890%                 or the anchor name.
5891% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
5892%                 empty for anchors.
5893% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
5894%
5895% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
5896% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
5897% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
5898%
5899\def\setref#1#2{%
5900  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
5901  \iflinks
5902    {%
5903      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
5904      \turnoffactive
5905      \otherbackslash
5906      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
5907	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
5908	  ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
5909      }%
5910      \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
5911      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
5912      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
5913      \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
5914    }%
5915  \fi
5916}
5917
5918% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
5919% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
5920% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
5921% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
5922%
5923\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5924\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5925\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
5926\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
5927  \unsepspaces
5928  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
5929  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
5930  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
5931  \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
5932  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
5933    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
5934    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
5935      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
5936      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
5937    \else
5938      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
5939      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
5940      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
5941        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
5942        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
5943      \else
5944        \ifhavexrefs
5945          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
5946          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
5947        \else
5948          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
5949          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
5950        \fi%
5951      \fi
5952    \fi
5953  \fi
5954  %
5955  % Make link in pdf output.
5956  \ifpdf
5957    \leavevmode
5958    \getfilename{#4}%
5959    {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
5960     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
5961       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
5962         goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
5963     \else
5964       \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
5965         goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}%
5966     \fi
5967    }%
5968    \linkcolor
5969  \fi
5970  %
5971  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
5972  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  We distinguish them by the
5973  % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
5974  {%
5975    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
5976    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
5977    \indexnofonts
5978    \turnoffactive
5979    \otherbackslash
5980    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
5981      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
5982  }%
5983  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
5984    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
5985    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
5986    \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
5987      \refx{#1-snt}%
5988    \else
5989      \printedrefname
5990    \fi
5991    %
5992    % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
5993    % "in MANUALNAME".
5994    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
5995      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
5996    \fi
5997  \else
5998    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
5999    %
6000    % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
6001    % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
6002    % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
6003    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
6004    % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
6005    % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
6006    \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
6007      \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
6008    \else
6009      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
6010      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
6011      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
6012      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
6013      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
6014      {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
6015       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
6016       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
6017       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
6018       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
6019      }%
6020      % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
6021      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
6022      %
6023      % But we always want a comma and a space:
6024      ,\space
6025      %
6026      % output the `page 3'.
6027      \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
6028    \fi
6029  \fi
6030  \endlink
6031\endgroup}
6032
6033% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
6034% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
6035% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
6036% one that Bob is working on :).
6037%
6038\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
6039
6040% Things referred to by \setref.
6041%
6042\def\Ynothing{}
6043\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
6044\def\Ynumbered{%
6045  \ifnum\secno=0
6046    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
6047  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
6048    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
6049  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
6050    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
6051  \else
6052    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
6053  \fi\fi\fi
6054}
6055\def\Yappendix{%
6056  \ifnum\secno=0
6057     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
6058  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
6059     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
6060  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
6061    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
6062  \else
6063    \putwordSection@tie
6064      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
6065  \fi\fi\fi
6066}
6067
6068% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
6069% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
6070%
6071\def\refx#1#2{%
6072  {%
6073    \indexnofonts
6074    \otherbackslash
6075    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
6076      \csname XR#1\endcsname
6077  }%
6078  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
6079    % If not defined, say something at least.
6080    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
6081    \iflinks
6082      \ifhavexrefs
6083        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
6084      \else
6085        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
6086          \global\warnedxrefstrue
6087          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
6088        \fi
6089      \fi
6090    \fi
6091  \else
6092    % It's defined, so just use it.
6093    \thisrefX
6094  \fi
6095  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
6096}
6097
6098% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Usually it's
6099% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
6100% collisions).  But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
6101%
6102\def\xrdef#1#2{%
6103  \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
6104  %
6105  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
6106  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
6107    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
6108    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
6109      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
6110    %
6111    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
6112    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
6113      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
6114    \else
6115      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
6116      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
6117    \fi
6118    %
6119    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
6120    % for later use in \listoffloats.
6121    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
6122  \fi
6123}
6124
6125% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
6126%
6127\def\tryauxfile{%
6128  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
6129  \ifeof 1 \else
6130    \readauxfile
6131    \global\havexrefstrue
6132  \fi
6133  \closein 1
6134}
6135
6136\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
6137  \catcode`\^^@=\other
6138  \catcode`\^^A=\other
6139  \catcode`\^^B=\other
6140  \catcode`\^^C=\other
6141  \catcode`\^^D=\other
6142  \catcode`\^^E=\other
6143  \catcode`\^^F=\other
6144  \catcode`\^^G=\other
6145  \catcode`\^^H=\other
6146  \catcode`\^^K=\other
6147  \catcode`\^^L=\other
6148  \catcode`\^^N=\other
6149  \catcode`\^^P=\other
6150  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
6151  \catcode`\^^R=\other
6152  \catcode`\^^S=\other
6153  \catcode`\^^T=\other
6154  \catcode`\^^U=\other
6155  \catcode`\^^V=\other
6156  \catcode`\^^W=\other
6157  \catcode`\^^X=\other
6158  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
6159  \catcode`\^^[=\other
6160  \catcode`\^^\=\other
6161  \catcode`\^^]=\other
6162  \catcode`\^^^=\other
6163  \catcode`\^^_=\other
6164  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
6165  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
6166  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
6167  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
6168  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
6169  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
6170  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
6171  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
6172  %
6173  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
6174  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
6175  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
6176  %
6177  \catcode`\^=\other
6178  %
6179  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
6180  \catcode`\~=\other
6181  \catcode`\[=\other
6182  \catcode`\]=\other
6183  \catcode`\"=\other
6184  \catcode`\_=\other
6185  \catcode`\|=\other
6186  \catcode`\<=\other
6187  \catcode`\>=\other
6188  \catcode`\$=\other
6189  \catcode`\#=\other
6190  \catcode`\&=\other
6191  \catcode`\%=\other
6192  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
6193  %
6194  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
6195  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
6196  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
6197  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
6198  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
6199  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
6200  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
6201  \catcode`\\=\other
6202  %
6203  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
6204  {%
6205    \count 1=128
6206    \def\loop{%
6207      \catcode\count 1=\other
6208      \advance\count 1 by 1
6209      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
6210    }%
6211  }%
6212  %
6213  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
6214  \catcode`\{=1
6215  \catcode`\}=2
6216  \catcode`\@=0
6217  %
6218  \input \jobname.aux
6219\endgroup}
6220
6221
6222\message{insertions,}
6223% including footnotes.
6224
6225\newcount \footnoteno
6226
6227% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
6228% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
6229% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
6230% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
6231% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
6232\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
6233
6234% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
6235\let\footnotestyle=\comment
6236
6237{\catcode `\@=11
6238%
6239% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
6240\gdef\footnote{%
6241  \let\indent=\ptexindent
6242  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
6243  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
6244  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
6245  %
6246  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
6247  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
6248  \let\@sf\empty
6249  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
6250  %
6251  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
6252  \unskip
6253  \thisfootno\@sf
6254  \dofootnote
6255}%
6256
6257% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
6258% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
6259%
6260% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
6261% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
6262% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
6263%
6264\gdef\dofootnote{%
6265  \insert\footins\bgroup
6266  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
6267  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
6268  % So reset some parameters.
6269  \hsize=\pagewidth
6270  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
6271  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
6272  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
6273  \floatingpenalty\@MM
6274  \leftskip\z@skip
6275  \rightskip\z@skip
6276  \spaceskip\z@skip
6277  \xspaceskip\z@skip
6278  \parindent\defaultparindent
6279  %
6280  \smallfonts \rm
6281  %
6282  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
6283  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
6284  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
6285  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
6286  \let\noindent = \relax
6287  %
6288  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
6289  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
6290  \everypar = {\hang}%
6291  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
6292  %
6293  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
6294  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
6295  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
6296  \footstrut
6297  \futurelet\next\fo@t
6298}
6299}%end \catcode `\@=11
6300
6301% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
6302% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
6303% would be lost.
6304% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
6305% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
6306% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
6307
6308% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
6309% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
6310% out prematurely.
6311%
6312\def\startsavinginserts{%
6313  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
6314    \let\insert\saveinsert
6315  \else
6316    \let\checkinserts\relax
6317  \fi
6318}
6319
6320% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
6321% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
6322%
6323\def\saveinsert#1{%
6324  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
6325  \afterassignment\next
6326  % swallow the left brace
6327  \let\temp =
6328}
6329\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
6330\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
6331
6332\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
6333
6334\def\placesaveins#1{%
6335  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
6336    {\box#1}%
6337}
6338
6339% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
6340{
6341  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
6342  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
6343}
6344
6345% initialization:
6346\def\newsaveins #1{%
6347  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
6348  \next
6349}
6350\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
6351  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
6352  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
6353    \checksaveins #1}%
6354}
6355
6356% initialize:
6357\let\checkinserts\empty
6358\newsaveins\footins
6359\newsaveins\margin
6360
6361
6362% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
6363% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
6364%
6365% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
6366% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
6367% undone and the next image would fail.
6368\openin 1 = epsf.tex
6369\ifeof 1 \else
6370  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
6371  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
6372  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
6373  \input epsf.tex
6374\fi
6375\closein 1
6376%
6377% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
6378\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
6379\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
6380  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
6381  it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
6382%
6383\def\image#1{%
6384  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
6385    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
6386      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
6387      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
6388      \global\warnednoepsftrue
6389    \fi
6390  \else
6391    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
6392  \fi
6393}
6394%
6395% Arguments to @image:
6396% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
6397% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
6398% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
6399% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
6400% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
6401\newif\ifimagevmode
6402\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
6403  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
6404  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
6405  % If the image is by itself, center it.
6406  \ifvmode
6407    \imagevmodetrue
6408    \nobreak\bigskip
6409    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
6410    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
6411    % above and below.
6412    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
6413    \nobreak
6414    \line\bgroup\hss
6415  \fi
6416  %
6417  % Output the image.
6418  \ifpdf
6419    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
6420  \else
6421    % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
6422    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
6423    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
6424    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
6425  \fi
6426  %
6427  \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi  % space after the image
6428\endgroup}
6429
6430
6431% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
6432% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
6433% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
6434%
6435\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
6436
6437% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
6438\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
6439
6440% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
6441% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
6442% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
6443%
6444% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
6445% be referable.
6446%
6447% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
6448% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
6449%
6450% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
6451% chapter-level command.
6452\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
6453%
6454\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
6455  \let\thiscaption=\empty
6456  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
6457  %
6458  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
6459  %
6460  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
6461  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
6462  %
6463  \startsavinginserts
6464  %
6465  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
6466  \par
6467  %
6468  \vtop\bgroup
6469    \def\floattype{#1}%
6470    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
6471    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
6472    %
6473    \ifx\floattype\empty
6474      \let\safefloattype=\empty
6475    \else
6476      {%
6477        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
6478        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
6479        \indexnofonts
6480        \turnoffactive
6481        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
6482      }%
6483    \fi
6484    %
6485    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
6486    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6487      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
6488      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
6489      %
6490      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
6491      \global\advance\floatno by 1
6492      %
6493      {%
6494        % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
6495        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
6496        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
6497        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
6498        % lists of floats.
6499        %
6500        \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
6501        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
6502      }%
6503    \fi
6504    %
6505    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
6506    \vskip\parskip
6507    %
6508    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
6509    \restorefirstparagraphindent
6510}
6511
6512% we have these possibilities:
6513% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
6514% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
6515% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
6516% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
6517% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
6518% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
6519% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
6520% @float & no caption:
6521%
6522\def\Efloat{%
6523    \let\floatident = \empty
6524    %
6525    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
6526    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
6527    %
6528    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
6529    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6530      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
6531        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
6532      \fi
6533      % the number.
6534      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
6535    \fi
6536    %
6537    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
6538    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
6539    \let\captionline = \floatident
6540    %
6541    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
6542      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
6543	\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
6544      \fi
6545      %
6546      % caption text.
6547      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
6548    \fi
6549    %
6550    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
6551    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
6552    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
6553      \vskip.5\parskip
6554      \captionline
6555      %
6556      % Space below caption.
6557      \vskip\parskip
6558    \fi
6559    %
6560    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
6561    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
6562    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
6563      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
6564      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
6565      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
6566      {%
6567        \atdummies \turnoffactive \otherbackslash
6568        % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
6569        % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
6570        % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
6571	\scanexp{%
6572	  \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
6573	    \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
6574	      \thiscaption
6575	    \else
6576	      \thisshortcaption
6577	    \fi
6578	  }%
6579	}%
6580        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
6581	  \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
6582      }%
6583    \fi
6584  \egroup  % end of \vtop
6585  %
6586  % place the captured inserts
6587  %
6588  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
6589  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
6590  %
6591  \checkinserts
6592}
6593
6594% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
6595%
6596\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
6597  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
6598}
6599
6600% @caption, @shortcaption
6601%
6602\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
6603\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
6604\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
6605\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
6606
6607% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
6608% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
6609\def\getfloatno#1{%
6610  \ifx#1\relax
6611      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
6612      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
6613      %
6614      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
6615      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
6616        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
6617  \fi
6618  \let\floatno#1%
6619}
6620
6621% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
6622% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
6623% first read the @float command.
6624%
6625\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
6626
6627% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
6628% distinguish floats from other xref types.
6629\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
6630
6631% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
6632% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
6633% \thissection value which we \setref above.
6634%
6635\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
6636%
6637% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
6638% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
6639%
6640\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
6641  \def\temp{#1}%
6642  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
6643  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
6644}
6645
6646% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
6647%
6648\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
6649  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
6650  {%
6651    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
6652    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
6653    \indexnofonts
6654    \turnoffactive
6655    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
6656  }%
6657  %
6658  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
6659  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
6660    \ifhavexrefs
6661      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
6662      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
6663    \fi
6664  \else
6665    \begingroup
6666      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
6667      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
6668      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
6669    \endgroup
6670  \fi
6671}
6672
6673% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
6674% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
6675% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
6676% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
6677%
6678% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
6679% they won't appear in the aux file).
6680%
6681\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
6682\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
6683  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
6684  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
6685  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
6686  % in pdf output.
6687  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
6688  %
6689  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
6690  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
6691  \writeentry
6692}}
6693
6694\message{localization,}
6695% and i18n.
6696
6697% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
6698% @setfilename.  If done too late, it may not override everything
6699% properly.  Single argument is the language abbreviation.
6700% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
6701%
6702\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
6703  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
6704    % Read the file if it exists.
6705    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
6706    \ifeof 1
6707      \errhelp = \nolanghelp
6708      \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
6709    \else
6710      \input txi-#1.tex
6711    \fi
6712    \closein 1
6713  \endgroup
6714}
6715\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
6716is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  In the current directory
6717should work if nowhere else does.}
6718
6719
6720% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
6721% likely, but for now just recognize it.
6722\let\documentencoding = \comment
6723
6724
6725% Page size parameters.
6726%
6727\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
6728
6729\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
6730\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
6731\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
6732
6733% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
6734\vbadness = 10000
6735
6736% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
6737\hbadness = 2000
6738
6739% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
6740\widowpenalty=10000
6741\clubpenalty=10000
6742
6743% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
6744% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
6745% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
6746% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
6747%
6748\def\setemergencystretch{%
6749  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
6750    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
6751    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
6752  \else
6753    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
6754  \fi
6755}
6756
6757% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
6758% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)
6759% physical page width.
6760%
6761% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
6762% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
6763%
6764\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
6765  \voffset = #3\relax
6766  \topskip = #6\relax
6767  \splittopskip = \topskip
6768  %
6769  \vsize = #1\relax
6770  \advance\vsize by \topskip
6771  \outervsize = \vsize
6772  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
6773  \pageheight = \vsize
6774  %
6775  \hsize = #2\relax
6776  \outerhsize = \hsize
6777  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
6778  \pagewidth = \hsize
6779  %
6780  \normaloffset = #4\relax
6781  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
6782  %
6783  \ifpdf
6784    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
6785    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
6786  \fi
6787  %
6788  \setleading{\textleading}
6789  %
6790  \parindent = \defaultparindent
6791  \setemergencystretch
6792}
6793
6794% @letterpaper (the default).
6795\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6796  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6797  \textleading = 13.2pt
6798  %
6799  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
6800  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
6801                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
6802                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
6803                    {11in}{8.5in}%
6804}}
6805
6806% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
6807\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
6808  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
6809  \textleading = 12pt
6810  %
6811  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
6812                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
6813                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
6814                    {9.25in}{7in}%
6815  %
6816  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
6817  \tolerance = 700
6818  \hfuzz = 1pt
6819  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6820  \defbodyindent = .5cm
6821}}
6822
6823% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
6824\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6825  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6826  \textleading = 13.2pt
6827  %
6828  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
6829  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
6830  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
6831  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
6832  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
6833  % your texinfo source file like this:
6834  % @tex
6835  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
6836  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
6837  % @end tex
6838  \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
6839                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
6840                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
6841                    {297mm}{210mm}%
6842  %
6843  \tolerance = 700
6844  \hfuzz = 1pt
6845  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6846  \defbodyindent = 5mm
6847}}
6848
6849% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
6850% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
6851% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
6852\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
6853  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
6854  \textleading = 12.5pt
6855  %
6856  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
6857                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
6858                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
6859                    {210mm}{148mm}%
6860  %
6861  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
6862  \tolerance = 800
6863  \hfuzz = 1.2pt
6864  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
6865  \defbodyindent = 2mm
6866  \tableindent = 12mm
6867}}
6868
6869% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
6870\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
6871  \afourpaper
6872  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
6873                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
6874                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
6875                    {297mm}{210mm}%
6876  %
6877  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
6878  \globaldefs = 0
6879}}
6880
6881% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
6882\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
6883  \afourpaper
6884  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
6885                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
6886                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
6887                    {297mm}{210mm}%
6888  \globaldefs = 0
6889}}
6890
6891% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
6892% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
6893% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
6894%
6895\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
6896\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
6897  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
6898  \globaldefs = 1
6899  %
6900  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
6901  \setleading{\textleading}%
6902  %
6903  \dimen0 = #1
6904  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
6905  %
6906  \dimen2 = \hsize
6907  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
6908  %
6909  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
6910                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
6911                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
6912                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
6913}}
6914
6915% Set default to letter.
6916%
6917\letterpaper
6918
6919
6920\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
6921
6922% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
6923\catcode`\"=\other
6924\catcode`\~=\other
6925\catcode`\^=\other
6926\catcode`\_=\other
6927\catcode`\|=\other
6928\catcode`\<=\other
6929\catcode`\>=\other
6930\catcode`\+=\other
6931\catcode`\$=\other
6932\def\normaldoublequote{"}
6933\def\normaltilde{~}
6934\def\normalcaret{^}
6935\def\normalunderscore{_}
6936\def\normalverticalbar{|}
6937\def\normalless{<}
6938\def\normalgreater{>}
6939\def\normalplus{+}
6940\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
6941
6942% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
6943% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
6944% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
6945%
6946% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
6947% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
6948% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
6949% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
6950%
6951\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
6952
6953% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
6954% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
6955% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
6956% this is not a problem.
6957\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
6958
6959% Turn off all special characters except @
6960% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
6961% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
6962% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
6963
6964\catcode`\"=\active
6965\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
6966\let"=\activedoublequote
6967\catcode`\~=\active
6968\def~{{\tt\char126}}
6969\chardef\hat=`\^
6970\catcode`\^=\active
6971\def^{{\tt \hat}}
6972
6973\catcode`\_=\active
6974\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
6975% Subroutine for the previous macro.
6976\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
6977
6978\catcode`\|=\active
6979\def|{{\tt\char124}}
6980\chardef \less=`\<
6981\catcode`\<=\active
6982\def<{{\tt \less}}
6983\chardef \gtr=`\>
6984\catcode`\>=\active
6985\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
6986\catcode`\+=\active
6987\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
6988\catcode`\$=\active
6989\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
6990
6991% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
6992% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
6993% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
6994% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
6995\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
6996
6997\catcode`\@=0
6998
6999% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
7000% as in \char`\\.
7001\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
7002\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
7003
7004% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
7005% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
7006% catcode other.
7007{\catcode`\\=\active
7008 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
7009 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
7010}
7011
7012% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
7013{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
7014
7015% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
7016\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}}
7017
7018\catcode`\\=\active
7019
7020% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
7021% even after parsing them.
7022@def@turnoffactive{%
7023  @let"=@normaldoublequote
7024  @let\=@realbackslash
7025  @let~=@normaltilde
7026  @let^=@normalcaret
7027  @let_=@normalunderscore
7028  @let|=@normalverticalbar
7029  @let<=@normalless
7030  @let>=@normalgreater
7031  @let+=@normalplus
7032  @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
7033  @unsepspaces
7034}
7035
7036% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
7037% the literal character `\'.  (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
7038% effect.)
7039%
7040@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
7041
7042% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
7043% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
7044@otherifyactive
7045
7046% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
7047% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
7048% a backslash.
7049%
7050@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
7051@global@let\ = @eatinput
7052
7053% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
7054% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
7055% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
7056% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
7057% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
7058%
7059@gdef@fixbackslash{%
7060  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
7061  @catcode`+=@active
7062  @catcode`@_=@active
7063}
7064
7065% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
7066@escapechar = `@@
7067
7068% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
7069@catcode`@& = @other
7070@catcode`@# = @other
7071@catcode`@% = @other
7072
7073
7074@c Local variables:
7075@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
7076@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
7077@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
7078@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
7079@c time-stamp-end: "}"
7080@c End:
7081
7082@c vim:sw=2:
7083
7084@ignore
7085   arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
7086@end ignore
7087